Sharp MX M620N M550U/N/M620U/N/M700U/N Operation Manual Copier GB User To The 0aa2aef0 D537 4473 9f55 15071352c713
User Manual: Sharp MX-M620N to the manual
Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 200
Download | |
Open PDF In Browser | View PDF |
MODEL MX-M550U MX-M620U MX-M700U MX-M550N MX-M620N MX-M700N DIGITAL MULTIFUNCTIONAL SYSTEM OPERATION MANUAL (for general information and copier operation) Page PART 1: GENERAL INFORMATION • BEFORE USING THE PRODUCT • MANAGING THE MACHINE • PERIPHERAL DEVICES 1-1 2-1 3-1 PART 2: COPIER OPERATION • MAKING COPIES • CONVENIENT COPY FUNCTIONS • MACHINE MAINTENANCE (FOR COPYING) • DOCUMENT FILING FUNCTION • SPECIFICATIONS 4-1 5-1 6-1 7-1 8-1 Be sure to become thoroughly familiar with this manual to gain the maximum benefi t from the product . Before installin g this product, be sure to read the installatio n requirement s and caution s sections . Be sure to keep all operation manuals handy for reference including this manual, the "Operation manual (for general information and copier operation)" and operation manuals for any optiona l equipmen t which has been installed . Each instruction also covers the optional units used with these products. In some areas, the "POWER" switch positions are marked "I" and " " on the copier instead of "ON" and "OFF". The symbol " " denotes the copier is not completely de-energized but in a stand-by condition at this "POWER" switch position. If your copier is so marked, please read "I" for "ON" and " " for "OFF". Caution! For a complete electrical disconnection, pull out the main plug. The socket-outlet shall be installed near the equipment and shall be easily accessible. Shielded interface cables must be used with this equipment to maintain compliance with EMC regulations. Trademark acknowledgments The following trademarks and registered trademarks are used in conjunction with the machine and its peripheral devices and accessories. • Microsoft®, Windows®, Windows® 98, Windows® Me, Windows NT® 4.0, Windows® 2000, Windows® XP, Windows® Server 2003 and Internet Explorer® are registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S.A. and other countries. • PostScript is a registered trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated. • Macintosh, Mac OS, AppleTalk, EtherTalk, LaserWriter, and Safari are registered trademarks or trademarks of Apple Computer, Inc. • Netscape Navigator is a trademark of Netscape Communications Corporation. • Adobe, the Adobe logo, Acrobat, the Adobe PDF logo, and Reader are registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and other countries. • PCL is a registered trademark of the Hewlett-Packard Company. • IBM, PC/AT, and PowerPC are trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation. • Sharpdesk is a trademark of Sharp Corporation. • All other trademarks and copyrights are the property of their respective owners. Candid and Taffy are trademarks of Monotype Imaging, Inc. registered in the United States Patent and Trademark Office and may be registered in certain jurisdictions. CG Omega, CG Times, Garamond Antiqua, Garamond Halbfett, Garamond Kursiv, Garamond and Halbfett Kursiv are trademarks of Monotype Imaging, Inc. and may be registered in certain jurisdictions. Albertus, Arial, Coronet, Gill Sans, Joanna and Times New Roman are trademarks of The Monotype Corporation registered in the United States Patent and Trademark Office and may be registered in certain jurisdictions. Avant Garde, ITC Bookman, Lubalin Graph, Mona Lisa, Zapf Chancery and Zapf Dingbats are trademarks of International Typeface Corporation registered in the United States Patent and Trademark Office and may be registered in certain jurisdictions. Clarendon, Eurostile, Helvetica, Optima, Palatino, Stempel Garamond, Times and Univers are trademarks of Heidelberger Druckmaschinen AG, which may be registered in certain jurisdictions, exclusively licensed through Linotype Library GmbH, a wholly owned subsidiary of Heidelberger Druckmaschinen AG. Apple Chancery, Chicago, Geneva, Monaco and New York are trademarks of Apple Computer Inc. and may be registered in certain jurisdictions. HGGothicB, HGMinchoL, HGPGothicB and HGPMinchoL are trademarks of Ricoh Company, Ltd. and may be registered in some jurisdictions. Wingdings is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries. Marigold and Oxford are trademarks of Arthur Baker and may be registered in some jurisdictions. Antique Olive is a trademark of Marcel Olive and may be registered in certain jurisdictions. Hoefler Text is a trademark of Johnathan Hoefler and may be registered in some jurisdictions. ITC is a trademark of International Typeface Corporation registered in the United States Patent and Trademark Office and may be registered in certain jurisdictions. Agfa is a trademark of the Agfa-Gevaert Group and may be registered in certain jurisdictions. Intellifont, MicroType and UFST are trademarks of Monotype Imaging, Inc. registered in the United States Patent and Trademark Office and may be registered in certain jurisdictions. Macintosh and TrueType are trademarks of Apple Computer Inc. registered in the United States Patent and Trademark Office and other countries. PostScript is a trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated and may be registered in some jurisdictions. HP, PCL, FontSmart and LaserJet are trademarks of Hewlett-Packard Company and may be registered in some jurisdictions. The Type 1 processor resident in Monotype Imaging's UFST product is under license from Electronics For Imaging, Inc. All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners. Part 1: General Information NOTES ● Considerable care has been taken in preparing this manual. If you have any comments or concerns about the manual, please contact your nearest authorised service representative. ● This product has undergone strict quality control and inspection procedures. In the unlikely event that a defect or other problem is discovered, please contact your dealer or nearest authorised service representative. ● Aside from instances provided for by law, SHARP is not responsible for failures occurring during use of the product or its options, or failures due to incorrect operation of the product and its options, or other failures, or for any damage that occurs due to use of the product. Warranty While every effort has been made to make this document as accurate and helpful as possible, SHARP Corporation makes no warranty of any kind with regard to its content. All information included herein is subject to change without notice. SHARP is not responsible for any loss or damages, direct or indirect, arising from or related to the use of this operation manual. © Copyright SHARP Corporation 2007. All rights reserved. Reproduction, adaptation or translation without prior written permission is prohibited, except as allowed under copyright laws. The display screens, messages, and key names shown in the manual may differ from those on the actual machine due to product improvements and modifications. OPERATION MANUALS The following operation manuals are provided for the machine. Please read the appropriate manuals as needed for the features you wish to learn about. ● Operation manual (for general information and copier operation) (this manual) The first half of this manual provides general information about the machine, including safety information, loading paper, removing misfeeds, and regular maintenance. The second half of the manual explains how to use the copy and document filing functions. ● Administrator settings guide The administrator settings are used by the administrator of the machine to configure functions to meet the needs of your workplace. This guide explains administrator settings for machine management, copying, and document filing. Administrator settings for the fax, printer, network scanner and Internet fax functions are explained in the manuals for those functions. ● Software setup guide This manual mainly explains how to install and configure the software that allows the machine to be used as a printer. ● Operation manual (for printer)*1 This manual explains the procedures for using the machine as a printer. ● Operation manual (for image send)*1 This manual explains the procedures for using the image send feature of the machine, including the network scanner and Internet fax functions. To use the network scanner function, the network function of the machine must be in a useable state*2 and the network scanner expansion kit must be installed. To use the Internet fax function, the network function of the machine must be in a useable state*2 and the network scanner expansion kit and the Internet fax expansion kit must be installed. *1 The Operation manual (for printer) and the Operation manual (for image send) are provided as PDF files in the CD-ROM. These manuals are not provided as printed manuals. *2 On the MX-M550U/M620U/M700U, the network expansion kit is required. 0-1 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS Improper installation may damage this product. Please note the following during initial installation and whenever the machine is moved. 1.The machine should be installed near an accessible power outlet for easy connection. 2.Be sure to connect the power cord only to a power outlet that meets the specified voltage and current requirements. Also make certain the outlet is properly grounded. ●For the power supply requirements, see the name plate on the back of the main unit. 3.Do not install your machine in areas that are: ●damp, humid, or very dusty ●exposed to direct sunlight ●poorly ventilated ●subject to extreme temperature or humidity changes, e.g., near an air conditioner or heater. 4.Be sure to allow the required space around the machine for servicing and proper ventilation. 30cm (11-13/16") 15cm (6-1/8") 60cm (23-5/8") A small amount of ozone is produced within the printer during operation. The emission level is insufficient to cause any health hazard. NOTE: The present recommended long term exposure limit for ozone is 0.1 ppm (0.2 mg/m3) calculated as an 8 hr. timeweighted average concentration. However, since the small amount that is emitted may have an objectionable odor, it is advisable to place the copier in a ventilated area. 0-2 CAUTIONS 1.Do not touch the photoconductive drum. Scratches or smudges on the drum will cause dirty prints. 2.The fusing unit is extremely hot. Exercise care in this area. 3.Do not look directly at the light source. Doing so may damage your eyes. Fusing unit 4.Four adjusters are provided on all optional stand/paper drawer units. These adjusters should be lowered until they contact the floor. When moving the machine with the optional stand/paper drawer, be sure to raise the adjusters. Also, unlock the two casters at the front of the optional stand/paper drawer. After moving the machine, lower the four adjusters until they reach the floor and lock the two casters. 5.Do not make any modifications to this machine. Doing so may result in personal injury or damage to the machine. 6.Since this machine is heavy, it is recommended that it be moved by more than one person to prevent injury. Adjuster 7.When connecting this machine to a computer, be sure to first turn both the computer and the machine off. Lock 8.Do not make copies of anything which is prohibited from copying by law. The following items are normally prohibited from printing by national law. Other items may be prohibited by local law. ● Money ● Stamps ● Bonds ● Stocks ● Bank drafts ● Checks ● Passports ● Driver's licences Release Caution: This connector (A) is only intended for service purposes. Any connection to this terminal may cause malfunctions of the machine. Instruction for service technician: The cable length for the service terminal has to be less than 3m (118"). (A) The machine includes the document filing function, which stores document image data on the machine's hard disk. Stored documents can be called up and printed or transmitted as needed. If a hard disk failure occurs, it will no longer be possible to call up the stored document data. To prevent the loss of important documents in the unlikely event of a hard disk failure, keep the originals of important documents or store the original data elsewhere. With the exception of instances provided for by law, Sharp Corporation bears no responsibility for any damages or loss due to the loss of stored document data. "BATTERY DISPOSAL" THIS PRODUCT CONTAINS A LITHIUM PRIMARY MEMORY BACK-UP BATTERY THAT MUST BE DISPOSED OF PROPERLY. PLEASE CONTACT YOUR LOCAL SHARP DEALER OR AUTHORIZED SERVICE REPRESENTATIVE FOR ASSISTANCE IN DISPOSING OF THIS BATTERY. This product utilizes tin-lead solder, and a fluorescent lamp containing a small amount of mercury. Disposal of these materials may be regulated due to environmental considerations. For disposal or recycling information, please contact your local authorities or the Electronics Industries Alliance: www.eia.org 0-3 CAUTIONS Laser Information Wave length Pulse times Output power 785 nm +10 nm -15 nm North America: 55 cpm / 62 cpm model: (3.1 µs ± 3.1 ns)/7 mm 70 cpm model: (2.7 µs ± 2.7 ns)/7 mm Europe: 55 cpm / 62 cpm model: (3.7 µs ± 3.7 ns)/7 mm 70 cpm model: (3.2 µs ± 3.2 ns)/7 mm Max 0.8 mW At the production line, the output power of the scanner unit is adjusted to 0.8 MILLIWATT PLUS 10 % and is maintained constant by the operation of the Automatic Power Control (APC). Caution Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure. For North America: SAFETY PRECAUTIONS This Digital Equipment is rated Class 1 and complies with 21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11 of the CDRH standards. This means that the equipment does not produce hazardous laser radiation. For your safety, observe the precautions below. ● Do not remove the cabinet, operation panel or any other covers. ● The equipment's exterior covers contain several safety interlock switches. Do not bypass any safety interlock by inserting wedges or other items into switch slots. For Europe: CAUTION INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION WHEN OPEN INTERLOCKS DEFEATED. AVOID EXPOSURE TO BEAM. CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT LASER KLASSE 1 VAROITUS! LAITTEEN KÄYTTÄMINEN MUULLA KUIN TÄSSÄ KÄYTTÖOHJEESSA MAINITULLA TAVALLA SAATTAA ALTISTAA KÄYTTÄJÄN TURVALLISUUSLUOKAN 1 YLITTÄVÄLLE NÄKYMÄTTÖMÄLLE LASERSÄTEILYLLE. VORSICHT UNSICHTBARE LASERSTRAHLUNG WENN ABDECKUNG GEÖFFNET UND SICHERHEITSVERRIEGELUNG ÜBERBRÜCKT. NICHT DEM STRAHL AUSSETZEN. LUOKAN 1 LASERLAITE VARNING OM APPARATEN ANVÄNDS PÅ ANNAT SÄTT ÄN I DENNA BRUKSANVISNING SPECIFICERATS, KAN ANVÄNDAREN UTSÄTTAS FÖR OSYNLIG LASERSTRÅLNING, SOM ÖVERSKRIDER GRÄNSEN FÖR LASERKLASS 1. ADVARSEL USYNLIG LASERSTRÅLNING VED ÅBNING, NÅR SIKKERHEDSBRYDERE ER UDE AF FUNKTION. UNDGÅ UDSAETTELSE FOR STRÅLNING. KLASS 1 LASERAPPARAT LASER KLASSE 1 Laserstrahl 0-4 CAUTION VORSICHT ADVARSEL ADVERSEL VARNING VARO! INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION WHEN OPEN AND INTERLOCKS DEFEATED. AVOID EXPOSURE TO BEAM. CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT UNSICHTBARE LASERSTRAHLUNG WENN ABDECKUNG GEÖFFNET UND SICHERHEITSVERRIEGELUNG ÜBERERÜCKT. NICHT DEM STRAHL AUSSETZEN. USYNLIG LASERSTRÅLING VED ÅBNING, NÅR SIKKERHEDSAFBRYDERE ER UDE AF FUNKTION. UNDGÅ UDSAETTELSE FOR STRÅLNING. USYNLIG LASERSTRÅLING NÅR DEKSEL ÅPNES OG SIKKERHEDSLÅS BRYTES. UNNGÅ EKSPONERING FOR STRÅLEN. OSYNLIG LASERSTRÅLNING NÄR DENNA DEL ÄR ÖPPNAD OCH SPÄRRAR ÄR URKOPPLADE. STRÅLEN ÄR FARLIG. BETRAKTA EJ STRÅLEN. AVATTAESSA JA SUOJALUKITUS OHITETTAESSA OLET ALTTIINA NÄKYMÄTÖNTÄ LASERSÄTEILYLLE. ÄLÄ KATSO SÄTEESEEN. CONTENTS Page OPERATION MANUALS .............................................. 0-1 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS............................... 0-2 CAUTIONS................................................................... 0-3 ● Laser Information ................................................. 0-4 CONTENTS ................................................................. 0-5 CHAPTER 1 BEFORE USING THE PRODUCT INTRODUCTION.......................................................... 1-2 MAIN FEATURES ........................................................ 1-3 PART NAMES AND FUNCTIONS................................ 1-10 ● Exterior................................................................. 1-10 ● Interior .................................................................. 1-11 ● Operation panel.................................................... 1-13 ● Touch panel .......................................................... 1-14 TURNING THE POWER ON AND OFF ....................... 1-17 AUDITING MODE ........................................................ 1-18 ● Using the machine when the auditing mode is enabled................................................................. 1-18 CHAPTER 2 MANAGING THE MACHINE LOADING PAPER ........................................................ 2-2 ● Identifying the trays .............................................. 2-2 ● Loading paper in paper tray 1 - tray 2 .................. 2-2 ● Changing the paper size in paper tray 1 - tray 2 .. 2-3 ● Loading paper in paper tray 3 .............................. 2-5 ● Changing the paper size in paper tray 3 .............. 2-5 ● Changing the paper size in paper tray 4 .............. 2-6 ● Loading paper in paper tray 5 (optional large capacity tray AR-LC6) ..................................................2-7 ● Loading paper in paper tray 5 (optional large capacity tray AR-LC7) ..................................................2-8 ● Loading paper in the bypass tray ......................... 2-10 ● Specifications of paper trays (Types and sizes of paper that can be used in the trays)..................... 2-12 ● Setting the paper type and paper size.................. 2-14 ● Setting the paper size when a special size is loaded .................................................................. 2-17 SYSTEM SETTINGS ................................................... 2-18 ● General procedure for system settings ................ 2-18 ● About the settings ................................................ 2-20 REPLACING THE TONER CARTRIDGES .................. 2-21 STORAGE OF SUPPLIES ........................................... 2-22 MISFEED REMOVAL ................................................... 2-23 ● Misfeed removal guidance.................................... 2-23 ● Misfeed in the transport area, fusing area, and exit area................................................................ 2-24 ● Misfeed in the duplex unit..................................... 2-25 ● Misfeed in the paper feed area............................. 2-26 REMOVING AN ORIGINAL MISFEED......................... 2-31 ● Removing a misfed original from the automatic document feeder .................................................. 2-31 TROUBLESHOOTING ................................................. 2-32 CHAPTER 3 PERIPHERAL DEVICES FINISHER AND SADDLE STITCH FINISHER .............3-2 ● Part names ...........................................................3-2 ● Specifications .......................................................3-2 ● Finishing methods ................................................3-4 ● Finishing modes and finisher functions ................3-6 ● Staple cartridge replacement and staple jam removal .................................................................3-7 ● Removing a misfeed .............................................3-11 ● Troubleshooting finisher/saddle stitch finisher problems ...............................................................3-13 INSERTER ...................................................................3-14 ● Part names ...........................................................3-14 ● Specifications .......................................................3-14 ● Loading paper.......................................................3-15 ● Manual operation of the inserter...........................3-15 ● Misfeed removal ...................................................3-17 ● Troubleshooting inserter problems .......................3-18 SHARP OSA.................................................................3-19 APPLICATION COMMUNICATION MODULE (MXAMX2)...........................................................................3-19 ● Standard application setup ...................................3-19 ● Selecting a standard application...........................3-19 ● Operation in OSA mode .......................................3-20 EXTERNAL ACCOUNT MODULE (MX-AMX3)............3-21 ● External account application setup.......................3-21 ● Operation in external account mode.....................3-21 CHAPTER 4 MAKING COPIES AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER............................4-2 ● Acceptable originals .............................................4-2 PLACING ORIGINALS .................................................4-3 CHECKING THE SIZE OF A PLACED ORIGINAL.......4-5 ● Manually setting the scanning size .......................4-5 STORING, DELETING, AND USING ORIGINAL SIZES ...........................................................................4-6 ● Storing or deleting an original size .......................4-6 NORMAL COPYING.....................................................4-7 ● Making copies with the automatic document feeding function ....................................................4-7 ● Automatic two-sided copying using the automatic document feeding function....................................4-10 ● Copying from the document glass ........................4-11 ● Automatic two-sided copying from the document glass .....................................................................4-13 ADJUSTING THE EXPOSURE ....................................4-14 REDUCTION/ENLARGEMENT/ZOOM ........................4-15 ● Automatic selection (auto image) .........................4-15 ● Manual selection (preset copy ratios/zoom) .........4-16 ● XY ZOOM .............................................................4-18 SPECIAL PAPERS .......................................................4-20 0-5 CONTENTS CHAPTER 5 CONVENIENT COPY FUNCTIONS CHAPTER 8 SPECIFICATIONS SPECIAL MODES ........................................................5-2 ● General procedure for using special functions .....5-2 ● Margin shift ...........................................................5-3 ● Erase ....................................................................5-4 ● Dual page copy.....................................................5-5 ● Pamphlet copy ......................................................5-6 ● Job build ...............................................................5-8 ● Tandem copy ........................................................5-10 ● Covers/inserts.......................................................5-12 ● Transparency film with insert sheets ....................5-23 ● Multi shot ..............................................................5-24 ● Book copy.............................................................5-26 ● Tab copy ...............................................................5-27 ● Card shot ................................................................. 5-29 ● Mirror image .........................................................5-31 ● B/W reverse ..........................................................5-31 ● Print menu ............................................................5-32 STORING, USING AND DELETING JOB PROGRAMS.................................................................5-44 ● Storing a job program ...........................................5-44 ● Calling up a job program ......................................5-45 ● Deleting a stored job program ..............................5-45 INTERRUPTING A COPY RUN ...................................5-46 SPECIFICATIONS ....................................................... 8-2 INDEX .......................................................................... 8-4 CHAPTER 6 MACHINE MAINTENANCE (FOR COPYING) USER MAINTENANCE ................................................6-2 ● Cleaning the document glass and the automatic document feeder...................................................6-2 TROUBLESHOOTING..................................................6-3 CHAPTER 7 DOCUMENT FILING FUNCTION OVERVIEW ..................................................................7-2 ● Document filing function .......................................7-2 TO USE THE DOCUMENT FILING FUNCTION ..........7-4 ● A look at the operation panel................................7-4 ● Saving files ...........................................................7-4 ● Main screen of document filing.............................7-5 ● Document filing icons ...........................................7-5 SAVING A DOCUMENT IMAGE FILE..........................7-6 ● Quick File..............................................................7-6 ● Filing .....................................................................7-7 ● Print jobs ..............................................................7-9 ● Scan Save ............................................................7-10 CALLING UP AND USING A FILE ...............................7-13 ● Searching for and calling up a saved file .............. 7-13 ● Calling up and using a saved file ..........................7-15 SYSTEM SETTINGS....................................................7-24 ● Creating, editing, and deleting user names and folders...................................................................7-24 ENTERING CHARACTERS .........................................7-29 TROUBLESHOOTING..................................................7-31 0-6 CHAPTER 1 BEFORE USING THE PRODUCT This chapter contains basic information that should be read before using the product. Page INTRODUCTION..................................................................................... 1-2 MAIN FEATURES ................................................................................... 1-3 PART NAMES AND FUNCTIONS........................................................... 1-10 ● Exterior............................................................................................ 1-10 ● Interior ............................................................................................. 1-11 ● Operation panel............................................................................... 1-13 ● Touch panel..................................................................................... 1-14 TURNING THE POWER ON AND OFF.................................................. 1-17 AUDITING MODE ................................................................................... 1-18 ● Using the machine when the auditing mode is enabled.................. 1-18 1-1 INTRODUCTION Thank you for purchasing a SHARP digital multifunction copier. Please read this manual before using the machine. In particular, be sure to read "INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS" before using the machine. Please keep this manual close at hand for reference whenever necessary. This manual provides general information on using the machine, such as routine maintenance and how to load paper and remove misfeeds. It also explains how to use the copier and document filing functions. Separate manuals have been provided for the fax function, printer function, and network scanner function. ■ Original and paper sizes This machine allows use of standard sizes in both the AB and inch systems. These are shown in the tables below. Sizes in the AB system Sizes in the inch system A3 11" x 17" (LEDGER) B4 8-1/2" x 14" (LEGAL) A4 8-1/2" x 13" (FOOLSCAP) B5 8-1/2" x 11" (LETTER) A5 7-1/4" x 10-1/2" (EXECUTIVE) 5-1/2" x 8-1/2" (INVOICE) ■ The meaning of "R" in original and paper size indications Some original and paper sizes can be placed in either the portrait or landscape orientations. To differentiate between landscape and portrait, the landscape orientation size indication will contain an "R". These are indicated as A4R, B5R, 8-1/2" x 11"R, 5-1/2" x 8-1/2"R, etc. Sizes that can be placed only in the landscape orientation (A3, B4, 11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 14", 8-1/2" x 13") do not contain the "R" in their size indication. Size indication with "R" 1-2 Landscape orientation Size indication without "R" Portrait orientation MAIN FEATURES The digital multifunction copier is capable of performing a variety of functions. This page shows features related to the copy function. ● Job programs See page 1-6 ● Sort mode See page 1-3 ● Mirror Image See page 1-6 ● Group mode See page 1-3 ● B/W Reverse See page 1-6 ● 2-sided Copy See page 1-3 ● Date print See page 1-6 ● Exposure Adjustments See page 1-3 ● Stamp See page 1-7 ● Reduction/Enlargement See page 1-4 ● Page numbering See page 1-7 ● XY Zoom See page 1-4 ● Text See page 1-7 ● Margin Shift See page 1-4 ● Interrupting a copy run See page 1-7 ● Erase See page 1-4 ● Offset mode See page 1-7 ● Dual Page Copy See page 1-4 ● Pamphlet Copy See page 1-4 (When the Finisher or Saddle stitch finisher is installed.) ● Job Build See page 1-5 ● Staple sort mode See page 1-7 ● Tandem Copy See page 1-5 (When the Finisher or Saddle stitch finisher is installed.) (When using the MX-M550U, MX-M620U, or ● Saddle stitch See page 1-8 MX-M700U, the network expansion kit is required.) (When the Saddle stitch finisher is installed.) ● Covers/inserts See page 1-5 ● Hole punching See page 1-8 ● Transparency Insert See page 1-5 (When the Punch Module is installed.) ● Multi Shot See page 1-5 ● Inserter mode See page 1-8 ● Book Copy See page 1-5 (When the Inserter is installed.) ● Tab Copy See page 1-6 ● Document filing function See page 1-8 ● Card Shot See page 1-6 Sort See page 4-9 Copies can be collated. Original 2-sided Copy See pages 4-10, 4-13 Copy onto both sides of the paper using the document glass or the automatic document feeder. Group Copy Original Copy See page 4-9 Copies can be grouped by page. Exposure Adjustments The desired image type for the original can be selected. Text Original See page 4-14 Text/Photo Photo Copy Resolution ABCDE ABCDE Lighter Darker Exposure 1-3 1 MAIN FEATURES Reduction / Enlargement See page 4-15 Copies can be enlarged or reduced to the desired size. Erase See page 5-4 Shadows that appear around the edges of copies of books or thick originals can be erased. Original Original Copy Copy Edge erase Centre erase Enlargement Reduction Edge+Centre erase XY Zoom See page 4-18 Separate ratio settings can be selected for the length and width of a copy. Original Dual Page Copy The left and right pages of a book can be successively copied onto separate sheets. Copy Margin Shift See page 5-3 Margins can be added to copies. See page 5-5 Book original Copy Pamphlet Copy See page 5-6 One-sided or two-sided pamphlet style copies can be made. One-sided copying Image shifted Image shifted Original to the right to the left Originals (one-sided) Finished copies are folded in two. Left binding 1 2 3 Margin Two-sided copying Original 4 Margin 5 6 8 Image shifted Image shifted to the right to the left Originals (two-sided) 2 1 Or Margin 1-4 First page 7 Margin 4 6 8 Right binding 3 5 7 First page MAIN FEATURES Job Build See page 5-8 When you have a very large number of originals, the pages can be scanned in sets. Transparency Insert See page 5-23 Inserts can be automatically inserted between transparencies. Originals (1-sided) Copy 1 Originals (2-sided) 300 sheets 150 sheets Tandem Copy 150 sheets See page 5-10 Two machines can be used to run a large copy job in parallel. Insert sheets Multi Shot Multiple original pages can be copied onto a single sheet of paper in a uniform layout. Originals (1-sided) 100 sets of copies 50 sets of copies See page 5-24 Originals (2-sided) Copy 50 sets of copies *When using the MX-M550U, MX-M620U, or MX-M700U, the network expansion kit is required. Covers/inserts See page 5-12 Front covers, back covers, and inserts can be added. These can also be copied on. Book Copy See page 5-26 Books and other bound originals can be copied pamphlet style. Original Originals Copy Left binding Back cover First page First page Front cover Insert sheets Right binding First page First page 1-5 MAIN FEATURES Tab Copy See page 5-27 Copying is possible on the tabs of tabbed paper. Original Tab paper Mirror Image See page 5-31 A mirror image copy can be made. Copy Original Copy INDEX INDEX Tab width A4 : Maximum of 20mm (51/64") 8-1/2" x 11" : Maximum of 17mm (5/8") Card Shot See page 5-29 The front and back of a card can be copied onto one sheet of paper. This function is convenient for making copies for certification purposes and helps save paper. Original B/W Reverse See page 5-31 White and black can be inverted on a copy to produce a negative image. Original Copy Copy CARD CARD Front of card CARD Back of card Example: Portrait A4 (8-1/2") size Job programs Example: Landscape A4 (8-1/2") size See page 5-44 Various steps of a copy operation can be stored as a program, and up to 10 programs can be stored. Saving frequently used sets of settings in a program saves you the trouble of selecting those settings each time you wish to use them. Date See page 5-35 The date can be added to copies. JOB PROGRAMS PRESS PROGRAM NUMBER. RECALL 1-6 2010/APR/4 MAIN FEATURES Stamp See page 5-36 Reverse text can be added to copies ("stamp"). Interrupting a copy run See page 5-46 A copy job in progress can be interrupted for a rush job. INTERRUPT 1 AUTO ORIGINAL CONFIDENTIAL A4 AUTO EXPOSUR AUTO Page numbering See page 5-37 Page numbers can be added to copies. Offset mode A4 See page 3-4 Each set of output can be offset slightly from other sets for easy separation. Offset mode Non-Offset mode *When the Finisher or Saddle stitch finisher is installed. Text See page 5-41 Entered text can be added to copies. Staple sort mode See page 3-4 Sets of copies can be automatically stapled. Original Copy Meeting *When the Finisher or Saddle stitch finisher is installed. 1-7 MAIN FEATURES Saddle stitch See page 3-5 When a saddle stitch finisher is installed, copies can be automatically folded in half and stapled at the fold. (Use with the pamphlet function (see page 5-6) or book copy function (see page 5-26).) Document filing function See chap. 7 A document image can be stored on the hard disk. A stored file can easily be called up and printed or transmitted. Saddle stitch binding Printed Document Image HDD Save to machine's hard disk 6 7 *When the Saddle stitch finisher is installed. Hole punching See page 3-5 Copies can be punched to add holes. Original Punch positions *When the Punch module is installed. Inserter mode See page 3-14 Blank or already printed-on sheets of paper can be added as a cover or an insert without being printed on. The inserter can be used to feed heavy sheets of paper that cannot be fed from other trays. Original *When the Inserter is installed. 1-8 Copy Call up a saved file to reuse Transmitted MAIN FEATURES Energy saving features This product has the following two power reducing modes that conform to the Energy Star guidelines to help conserve natural resources and reduce environmental pollution. Preheat mode The preheat mode is the first level of power reduction. The power is reduced to the fuser unit a preset time after the machine has completed a job and no further machine operations have been performed. The machine can recover to the ready condition within a short period of time. The preset time to enter the mode can be set by a administrator settings. Products that have earned the ENERGY STAR® are designed to protect the environment through superior energy efficiency. Auto power shut-off mode The auto power shut-off mode is the second level of power reduction. In this mode power is shut off to the fusing unit and the touch panel. In this state more energy is saved than in the preheat mode but the time to recover to the ready condition will be longer. The preset time to enter this mode can be set by a administrator settings. When this product is used as a printer, and either of the above modes is active, the mode will be deactivated automatically by an incoming job and the machine will automatically warm up and start to print when it has reached the ready temperature. When this product is configured for multi-function operation, and either of the above modes is active, the mode will be deactivated as above by an incoming print job. Either mode will also be deactivated by operation of DOCUMENT FILING, IMAGE SEND or COPY mode key. 1-9 1 PART NAMES AND FUNCTIONS Exterior (AR-F15) 1 Saddle stitch finisher (AR-F16)*1 / 9 Finisher (AR-F15)*1 (See page 3-2) 2 Punch module (AR-PN4A)*1 (See page 3-2) 3 Inserter (AR-CF2)*1 (See page 3-14) 4 Automatic document feeder (See page 4-2) Power switch (See page 1-17) Turns the power on and off. If the power does not come on when the power switch is turned on, check the main power switch to see if it is turned on. 10 Tray 5 (Large capacity tray(AR-LC6))*1 (See page 2-7) This automatically feeds and scans multiple sheet originals. Both sides of two-sided originals can be scanned at once. 5 11 (See page 2-8) 12 Open to replace toner cartridge. Operation panel 7 Centre tray (See page 4-9) 13 Finished sheets are deposited here 8 Tray 1-Tray 2 The trays hold paper. Approximately 800 sheets of standard A4 or 8-1/2" x 11" size paper (80 g/m2 (20 lbs.)) can be loaded in tray 1, and approximately 1200 sheets of standard A4 or 8-1/2" x 11" size paper (80 g/m2 (20 lbs.)) can be loaded in tray 2. Front cover 6 Tray 5 (Large capacity tray(AR-LC7))*1 Tray 3 Tray 3 holds paper. Approximately 500 sheets of standard (80 g/m2 (20 lbs.)) paper can be loaded in this tray. Tabbed paper and transparencies can also be loaded. Bypass tray Special papers (including transparency film) and copy paper can be fed from the bypass tray. 14 Tray 4 Tray 4 holds paper. Approximately 500 sheets of standard (80 g/m2 (20 lbs.)) paper can be loaded in this tray. *1 , 2 , 3 , 10 and 11 are peripheral devices. For information on these devices, see the explanations of the devices in the manual. 1 1-10 PART NAMES AND FUNCTIONS Interior 1 15 Duplex unit 20 16 Fusing unit Right side cover Open when a misfeed has occurred in the bypass tray or large capacity tray. Open this cover to remove a misfeed from the fusing unit area. 21 Upper cover of large capacity tray Open when a misfeed has occurred in the large capacity tray. Toner images are fused here. CAUTION The fusing unit is hot. Take care in removing misfed paper. 17 Cover of the duplex unit 22 Push this knob up to open the left side cover. 23 Left cover of paper drawer Open this cover to remove paper misfed in tray 3 or tray 4. Open when a misfeed has occurred in duplex unit. 18 Left side cover release Toner cartridge*2 This holds toner for printing. The toner cartridge must be replaced when indicated on the operation panel. 24 Photoconductive drum Images are formed on the photoconductive drum. NOTE 19 Main power switch (See page 1-17) Do not touch or damage the photoconductive drum. Keep this switch turned on when the fax option or Internet fax option is installed. *2 See page 2-21 for the procedure for installing and replacing the toner cartridge. 1-11 PART NAMES AND FUNCTIONS ■ Other optional equipment ●Network expansion kit (MX-NBX1) This kit is required to add on the network function. When this expansion kit is installed, the machine can be used as a network printer. ●Barcode font kit (AR-PF1) This kit adds bar code fonts to the machine. ● Data security kit (MX-FRX5) This kit is used to erase electronic data from the hard disk and memory immediately after a document is printed or transmitted. ●PS3 expansion kit (MX-PKX1) This kit provides compatibility of PostScript level 3 to the printer. ●Facsimile expansion kit (AR-FX8) This kit is required to add fax function. ●Network scanner expansion kit (MX-NSX1) This kit is required to add the network scanning feature. To add the network scanner function to the MX-M550U, MX-M620U, or MX-M700U, the network expansion kit is required. ●Internet fax expansion kit (MX-FWX1) This kit is required to use the Internet fax function. To add the Internet fax function, the network scanner expansion kit is required. ●Application integration module (MX-AMX1) The application integration module can be combined with the network scanner function to append a metadata file to a scanned image file. ●Application communication module (MX-AMX2) This allows the machine to be linked over a network to an external software application. ●Additional fax memory (8 MB) (AR-MM9) ●256MB expansion memory board (AR-SM5) This extends the memory of the machine. ●External account module (MX-AMX3) This is required to use an external account application on the machine. Peripheral devices are basically optional, but are incorporated in some models as standard equipment. 1-12 PART NAMES AND FUNCTIONS Operation panel DOCUMENT FILING IMAGE SEND 1 PRINT READY DATA LINE DATA COPY SYSTEM JOB STATUS SETTINGS 1 Touch panel The machine status, messages and touch keys are displayed on the panel. The document filing, copy, network scanner*1, and fax*2, Internet fax*3 functions are used by switching to the screen for the desired function. See the following page. 2 LOGOUT 5 This is used to store, edit, and delete user names and folder names for the document filing function, and to configure the administrator settings and printer configuration settings. (See page 7-24) 6 Mode select keys and indicators Use to change modes and the corresponding display on the touch panel. [DOCUMENT FILING] key 7 PRINT mode indicators 8 9 Press to display the current job status. (See page 1-15.) [C] key (Clear key) This key is used in copy mode, document filing mode, network scanner mode*1, fax mode*2, and Internet fax mode*3. 10 [START] key Use this key to start copying in copy mode, scan a document in network scanner mode*1, or scan a document for transmission in fax mode*2 or Internet fax mode*3. Print data can be received when this indicator is lit. DATA indicator 4 [#/P] key This is used as a program key when using the copy function, and to dial when using the fax function*2. READY indicator Lights up or blinks when print data is being received. Also lights up or blinks when printing is being performed. [JOB STATUS] key [ ] key ([LOGOUT] key) This key is used in copy mode, document filing mode, network scanner mode*1, fax mode*2, and Internet fax mode*3. [COPY] key Press to select the copy mode. 3 Numeric keys Use to enter numeric values for various settings. Press to select the document filing mode. (See page 7-5.) [IMAGE SEND] key/LINE indicator/DATA indicator Press to change the display to network scanner mode*1, fax mode*2 or Internet fax mode*3. (See the "Operation manual (for image send)") and "Operation manual (for facsimile)".) [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key 11 [CA] key (Clear all key) This key is used in copy mode, document filing mode, network scanner mode*1, fax mode*2, and Internet fax mode*3. Use the key to cancel settings and perform an operation from the initial machine state. *1 When the network scanner option is installed. *2 When the fax option is installed. *3 When the Internet fax option is installed. 1-13 PART NAMES AND FUNCTIONS Touch panel The touch panel screens shown in this manual are printed images, and may appear different from the actual screens. ■ Selecting a function [Example 1] OCK ONTO 0 ■ Using the touch panel [Example 1] OK PRINT ON INSERT SHEETS Items on the touch panel are easily selectable by 003 / 000 COPY touching the key 003 / 000 associated with the item 001 010 / 000 with a finger. Selection 0666211221 of an item will be Beep accompanied with a tone beep tone* to confirm the item was selected. Also, the key area for the item will be highlighted for visual confirmation. JOB QUEUE OK CANCEL YES NO PAPER IS FED FROM INSERTER SETS / PROG [Example 2] A function in the special functions screen is selected by touching the key so that it is highlighted. To cancel the selection, touch the highlighted key once again. DUAL PAGE COPY TANDEM COPY * If a greyed out key is touched, a double beep will sound. Copier feature [Example 2] 1/13 If a key is highlighted in a setting screen at the time the screen appears, the [OK] key can be pressed to store the selection without further operation. COMPLETE Keys which are greyed out on any screen are not selectable. ● ● ● ● ● Dual page copy Job build Tandem copy Mirror image B/W Reverse [Example 3] A corresponding icon representing the feature will appear on the touch 2-SIDED COPY key and on the main OUTPUT 1. 2. screen of the mode FILE A4 B5 3. B4 selected. If this icon is 4. A3 QUICK FILE touched, the setting screen of the function (or a menu screen) will appear, allowing the settings to be checked or adjusted and the function to be cancelled easily. READY TO SCAN FOR COPY. The confirmation beeps can be disabled using "Keys touch sound" in the administrator settings. (See page 10 of the administrator settings guide.) 1-14 SPECIAL MODES ORIGI PART NAMES AND FUNCTIONS ■ Job status screen (common to print, scan, fax and Internet fax) This screen is displayed when the [JOB STATUS] key on the operation panel is pressed. This screen can be used to display the "JOB QUEUE" (showing stored jobs and the current job) or the "COMPLETE" job list (showing finished jobs). This screen is used to check jobs, move a job to the top of the JOB QUEUE, or delete a job. JOB QUEUE SETS / PROGRESS 020 / 001 COPYING COPY 020 / 000 PAPER EMPTY Suzuki 020 / 000 WAITING 066211221 002 / 000 WAITING SCAN TO PRINT JOB 1 STATUS COPY The displayed jobs in the job list are themselves operation keys. To cancel printing or to give a job the highest print priority, touch the relevant job key to select the job and execute the desired operation using the keys described in 8 and 9 . This shows the current job and the jobs waiting to be run. The icons to the left of the jobs in the queue show the job mode. The document filing reprint job icon is highlighted. Note that the icon does not become highlighted during retransmission of a fax/image transmission job. Print mode Copy mode SCAN mode Scan to e-mail job Scan to FTP job Scan to Desktop job Scan to Network folder job Fax mode Fax send job Fax reception job PC-Fax send job Internet Fax mode i-Fax send job 1/1 JOB QUEUE JOB QUEUE COMPLETE COMPLETE DETAIL DETAIL PRIORITY STOP/DELETE INTERNET-FAX FAX JOB Job list 1 "COMPLETE" job screen *1 "JOB QUEUE" screen CALL INTERNET-FAX *1 "PAPER EMPTY" in the job status display When a job status display indicates "PAPER EMPTY", the specified paper size for the job is not loaded in any of the trays. In this case, the job will be suspended until the required paper is loaded. Other stored jobs will be printed (if possible) until the required paper is loaded. (Other jobs will not be printed if the paper runs out during printing.) If you need to change the paper size because the specified paper size is not available, touch the current job key to select it and then touch the [DETAIL] key described in 10 . 2 Mode select key This switches the job list display between "JOB QUEUE" and "COMPLETE". "JOB QUEUE": Shows stored jobs and the job in progress. "COMPLETE": Shows finished jobs. Files saved using the "FILE" and "QUICK FILE" functions and finished broadcast transmission jobs appear as keys in the finished job screen. The "FILE" or "QUICK FILE" job keys in the finished job screen can be touched, followed by the [CALL] key, to call up a finished job and print or transmit it. A finished broadcast transmission job key can be touched followed by the [DETAIL] key to check the result of the transmission. i-Fax reception job PC-Internet Fax send job 1-15 PART NAMES AND FUNCTIONS 3 [PRINT JOB] key 9 4 [SCAN TO] key 10 This displays the transmission status and finished jobs of scan mode (Scan to e-mail, Scan to FTP, Scan to Desktop, and Scan to Network Folder) when the network scanner option is installed. 5 [DETAIL] key This shows detailed information on the selected job. Files saved using the "FILE" and "QUICK FILE" functions and finished broadcast transmission jobs appear as keys in the finished job screen. A Quick File in the finished job screen or the [Filing] key can be touched, followed by the [CALL] key, to call up a finished job and print or transmit it. A finished broadcast transmission job key can be touched followed by the [DETAIL] key to check the result of the transmission. [FAX JOB] key This displays the transmission/reception status and finished jobs of fax mode (fax and PC-Fax) when the fax option is installed. 6 [PRIORITY] key A stored job in the "JOB QUEUE" job list can be printed ahead of all other stored jobs by selecting the job and then touching this key. This displays the print job list of print mode (copying, printing, fax reception, Internet fax reception, and self printing). Display switching keys Use to switch the page of the displayed job list. 7 [INTERNET-FAX] key This displays the transmission/reception status and finished jobs of Internet fax mode and PC Internet fax mode when the Internet fax option is installed. 8 [STOP/DELETE] key Use to cancel or delete the current job or delete the selected reserved job. Note that printing of received faxes and received Internet faxes cannot be cancelled or deleted. 1-16 11 [CALL] key When this key is touched after selecting a job in the COMPLETE job status screen (a job stored using the FILE or QUICK FILE keys of the document filing function), the "JOB SETTINGS" menu screen appears to let you resend or reprint the finished job. (See "Document filing function" on page 7-2.) TURNING THE POWER ON AND OFF The machine has two power switches. The main power switch can be found at the upper right after the front cover is opened. The power switch is located at the upper left of the right side of the machine. The two switches are normally used as follows: CAUTION Before turning off the main power switch, make sure that the communication and data lights are not blinking on the operation panel. Turning off the main power switch or unplugging the power cord while the lights are blinking may damage the hard disk and cause the data being stored or received to be lost. "ON" position "OFF" position Main power switch Power switch Main power switch: Normally kept in the ON position. (Be sure to keep ON when using the fax function.) Power switch : Turn to ON position before using the machine. Turn OFF at night when the machine is not used. Main power switch ON, Power switch ON The copy, printer, fax*, Internet fax*, network scanner*, and document filing functions can be used. If the machine is not used for a certain interval after turning on the power switch, the machine will automatically enter a reduced power consumption state (preheat mode or auto power shut-off mode (see page 1-9)). Main power switch ON, Power switch OFF Set the switches in this way at night or at other times when the machine is not being used. The touch panel cannot be used, however, the following functions will remain operational: When the fax option is installed: Automatic fax reception, timer transmission (automatic transmission at a specified time), and transmission when a polling request is received from another machine (remote transmission, relay broadcast transmission) When the Internet fax option is installed: Automatic Internet fax reception * The required options must be installed to use these functions. Main power switch OFF, Power switch ON Main power switch OFF, Power switch OFF The copy, printer, fax, Internet fax, network scanner, and document filing functions cannot be used. The copy, printer, fax, Internet fax, network scanner, and document filing functions cannot be used. Turn both switches off and unplug the power cord if you suspect a machine failure, if there is a bad thunderstorm nearby, or when you are moving the machine. 1-17 1 AUDITING MODE Auditing mode can be enabled to keep track of the number of pages printed and transmitted (scanned) by each account (up to 500 accounts can be established). The page counts can be viewed and totaled as needed.Using the machine when the auditing mode is enabled The procedure for making copies when auditing mode has been enabled for the copy function is explained below. NOTES ● When auditing mode is enabled for document filing and fax/image transmission, a message will appear asking you to enter your account number each time you switch to the main screen of one of those functions in the touch panel. Enter your account number in the same way as for copy mode, and then begin the scanning procedure. ● When the account counter is turned on for the printer function, you must enter your account number in the setting screen of the printer driver on your computer in order to print. When the account counter is turned on, the right message appears on the touch panel. ENTER YOUR ACCOUNT NUMBER. When the above screen appears, enter your 5-digit account number and then begin the copying procedure. your account number (5 digits) with 1 Enter the numeric keys. LOGOUT As you enter your account number, the hyphens (-) change to asterisks ( ). If you enter an incorrect digit, press the key and re-enter the correct digit. When a correct account number is entered, the following message will appear. ACCOUNT STATUS COPIES :MADE /REMAINING :00,123,000/00,012,456 OK the appropriate steps to perform 2 Follow the copy job. When copying is begun, the following message will appear. READY TO SCAN FOR COPY. PRESS [LOGOUT] WHEN FINISHED. To perform an interrupt copy job (page 5-46), touch the [INTERRUPT] key and then enter your account number as explained in step 1. The following message will appear. COPY INTERRUPT MODE. READY TO SCAN FOR COPY. If a limit has been set in the administrator settings for the number of copies that can be made by the account, the remaining number that can be made is displayed. the copy job is finished, press the 3 When [ ] key ([LOGOUT] key) Check the number in the display and touch the [OK] key. NOTE If "ACCOUNT NUMBER SECURITY" is enabled in the administrator settings and an incorrect account number is entered three times in a row, "PLEASE SEE YOUR ADMINISTRATOR FOR ASSISTANCE." will appear (page 8 of the administrator settings guide). Operation is not possible while this message appears (about one minute). 1-18 LOGOUT CHAPTER 2 MANAGING THE MACHINE This chapter explains how to load paper, replace the toner cartridge, and remove paper misfeeds. It also contains information about supplies. Page LOADING PAPER ................................................................................... 2-2 ● Identifying the trays ......................................................................... 2-2 ● Loading paper in paper tray 1 - tray 2 ............................................. 2-2 ● Changing the paper size in paper tray 1 - tray 2 ............................. 2-3 ● Loading paper in paper tray 3 ......................................................... 2-5 ● Changing the paper size in paper tray 3 ......................................... 2-5 ● Changing the paper size in paper tray 4 ......................................... 2-6 ● Loading paper in paper tray 5 (optional large capacity tray AR-LC6) ... 2-7 ● Loading paper in paper tray 5 (optional large capacity tray AR-LC7) ... 2-8 ● Loading paper in the bypass tray .................................................... 2-10 ● Specifications of paper trays (Types and sizes of paper that can be used in the trays)............................................................................. 2-12 ● Setting the paper type and paper size ............................................ 2-14 ● Setting the paper size when a special size is loaded...................... 2-17 SYSTEM SETTINGS .............................................................................. 2-18 ● General procedure for system settings ........................................... 2-18 ● About the settings ........................................................................... 2-20 REPLACING THE TONER CARTRIDGES ............................................. 2-21 STORAGE OF SUPPLIES ...................................................................... 2-22 MISFEED REMOVAL .............................................................................. 2-23 ● Misfeed removal guidance .............................................................. 2-23 ● Misfeed in the transport area, fusing area, and exit area................ 2-24 ● Misfeed in the duplex unit................................................................ 2-25 ● Misfeed in the paper feed area........................................................ 2-26 REMOVING AN ORIGINAL MISFEED ................................................... 2-31 ● Removing a misfed original from the automatic document feeder .. 2-31 TROUBLESHOOTING ............................................................................ 2-32 2-1 LOADING PAPER If the paper runs out during printing, a message will appear in the display. Follow the procedure below to load paper. Identifying the trays The trays are identified using numbers as shown below. For the types and sizes of paper that can be used in each tray, see page 2-12. 1 Tray 1 This is the left large capacity tray. 2 Tray 3 3 Tray 4 4 Tray 2 This is the right large capacity tray. 5 Tray 5 This is an optional large capacity tray. 6 Bypass tray NOTES ● Do not use curled or folded paper. Doing so may cause a misfeed. ● Do not place heavy objects or press hard on any tray which is pulled out. ● Do not place objects on the large-capacity tray. This may damage the tray or interfere with operation. ● Load paper with the print side face up. However, when the paper type is set to "PRE-PRINTED" or "LETTER HEAD", load the paper face down*. * If the two-sided function is disabled using "DISABLING OF DUPLEX" in the administrator settings (page 11 of the administrator settings guide), load the paper face up. Loading paper in paper tray 1 - tray 2 A4 or 8-1/2" x 11" size paper can be loaded in tray 1. A4 or 8-1/2" x 11" size paper can be loaded in tray 2. These are parallel large-capacity trays that allow a total of approximately 2000 sheets of SHARP standard paper (80 g/m2 (20 lbs.)) to be loaded. If you wish to change the paper size of tray 1 or tray 2, see "Changing the paper size in paper tray 1 - tray 2" on the next page. 1 Pull out paper tray 1-tray 2. Gently pull the tray out until it stops. 2 Load paper in the left and right trays. Indicator line Indicator line Lift the paper guide and load paper in tray 1.*1 Approximately 800 sheets of SHARP standard paper (80 g/m2 (20 lbs.)) can be loaded. Be sure to return the paper guide to its original position after loading the paper. Load paper in tray 2.*1 Approximately 1200 sheets of SHARP standard paper (80 g/m2 (20 lbs.)) can be loaded. *1 The paper stack must not be higher than the indicator line. 2-2 LOADING PAPER 3 Gently push tray 1-tray 2 into the machine. Push the tray firmly all the way into the machine. 4 Set the paper type. If the paper size was changed from an AB size to an inch size, or from an inch size to an AB size, or if the paper type was changed, be sure to change the appropriate settings as explained in "Setting the paper type and paper size" (See page 2-14). paper in paper tray 1/tray 2 is now 5 Loading complete. 2 Changing the paper size in paper tray 1 - tray 2 To change the paper size of tray 1 - tray 2, follow the steps below. This section only explains how to change the paper size. For the procedures for opening/closing the tray and loading paper, see "Loading paper in paper tray 1 - tray 2" (page 2-2). To have the paper size of tray 1 changed to B5, or to have the paper size of tray 1 changed from B5 to another size, consult your dealer or nearest authorised service representative. (Only a service technician can change the paper size in this case.) 1 Remove the paper size guide. Tray 1 the paper size guide to the paper 2 Adjust size to be used. Tray 2 (A) (B) LT A4 A4 LT Hook Paper guide With the base of the tray pressed all the way down, hold down the hook at the bottom on the paper size guide and pull the paper size guide up slightly. NOTES ● Do not place heavy objects on the tray or press down on the tray. ● Before changing the paper size of tray 1, raise the paper guide. Paper sizes are inscribed at the slot (A) on the bottom of the tray and at the hole (B) at the top of the paper size guide. ("LT" indicates 8-1/2" x 11" size.) Align the bottom of the paper size guide with the slot, and align the hole at the top with the locking tab. NOTES ● When attaching the paper size guide, make sure that the top and bottom of the guide are aligned to the same paper size. ● If the top and bottom of the paper size guide are not aligned to the same paper size, skewed feeding and misfeeds will result. 2-3 LOADING PAPER in the paper guide so that it locks 3 Push into place. 5 Set the paper type and paper size. For the procedure for configuring these settings, see "Setting the paper type and paper size" (page 2-14). An incorrect paper type or paper size setting may cause automatic selection of the wrong type or size of paper, and result in a misfeed or otherwise prevent printing. Push the paper size guide in until the hook at the bottom locks into place. (You will hear a "click" when the hook locks.) Move the paper size guide slightly to verify that it has locked into place. steps 1 to 3 to adjust the far paper 4 Repeat guide to the paper size to be used. Be sure to adjust the far paper guide to the same size as the near paper guide. NOTES ● When removing and attaching the far paper size guide, take care not to hit the front cover of the machine. ● Adjust both the front and back guides. If only one guide is adjusted, skewed feeding and misfeeds may result. 2-4 LOADING PAPER Loading paper in paper tray 3 Approximately 500 sheets of standard paper (80 g/m2 (20 lbs.)) from A3 to A5R size (11" x 17" to 5-1/2" x 8-1/2"R) can be loaded in tray 3. Special papers such as tabbed paper and transparency film can also be loaded. For information on what special papers can be used, see "Specifications of paper trays (Types and sizes of paper that can be used in the trays)" on page 2-12. To load tabbed paper or transparency film, see "Loading tabbed paper" or "Loading transparency film" on the next page. 1 Pull out paper tray 3. 3 Gently push tray 3 into the machine. Gently pull the tray out until it stops. 2 Load paper into the tray. The paper stack must not be higher than the indicator line (no more than 500 sheets of SHARP standard paper (80 g/m2 (20 lbs.)). To change the paper size, see "Changing the paper size in paper tray 3" below. Push the tray firmly all the way into the machine. 4 Set the paper type. If the paper size was changed from an AB size to an inch size, or from an inch size to an AB size, or if the paper type was changed, be sure to change the appropriate settings as explained in "Setting the paper type and paper size" (see page 2-14). paper 5 Loading complete. in paper tray 3 is now Changing the paper size in paper tray 3 1 Pull out paper tray 3. 4 Gently push tray 3 into the machine. If paper remains in the tray, remove it. the guide plates A and B by 2 Adjust squeezing their lock levers and sliding them to the paper size to be loaded. The guide plates A and B are slidable. Adjust them to the paper size to be loaded while squeezing their lock levers. 3 Load paper into the tray. Push the tray firmly all the way into the machine. the paper type of the paper that was 5 Set loaded in tray 3. Be sure to change the appropriate settings as explained in "Setting the paper type and paper size" (see page 2-14). If you changed the paper size, be sure to change the paper size setting. An incorrect paper size setting will cause the wrong paper to be automatically selected and may prevent printing or cause misfeeds. the paper size in paper tray 3 is 6 Changing now complete. 2-5 2 LOADING PAPER ■ Loading tabbed paper When using tabbed paper, follow the steps below to attach the special guide to the divider plate at the bottom edge of the tabbed paper. (Tabbed paper cannot be used in tray 4.) 1 Take out the tabbed paper guide. 3 Place the tabbed paper in the tray. The guide is stored inside the left side of the machine as shown. Be sure to replace the guide when you have finished using it. 2 Pull out the tray and attach the guide. [Example] Make sure that the positions of the tabs correspond with the originals as shown below. Original Tabbed paper DEF ABC Front side GHI JKL Slide the divider plate to the position of the bottom edge of the tabbed paper and attach the guide so that it covers the divider plate. Place the tabbed paper with the print side face up. 1st page 2nd page 3rd page 4th page 1st page 2nd page 3rd page 4th page push the tray in and set the paper 4 Gently type to tabbed paper. (See "Setting the paper type and paper size" on page 2-14) ■ Loading transparency film Be sure to load transparency film with the label facing down and the film oriented vertically. Smudging and a dirty image may result if the film is loaded with the label facing up. (Transparency film cannot be used in tray 4.) Changing the paper size in paper tray 4 Plain paper from A3 to B5 size (11" x 17" to 7-1/4" x 10-1/2"R) can be loaded in tray 4. For paper that can be used, see "Specifications of paper trays (Types and sizes of paper that can be used in the trays)" on page 2-12. The procedures for loading paper in tray 4 and changing the paper size are the same as for tray 3 (see page 2-5). NOTE When referring to the explanations of tray 3, keep in mind that special papers such as tabbed paper and transparency film cannot be used in tray 4. Use tray 3 for special paper. 2-6 LOADING PAPER Loading paper in paper tray 5 (optional large capacity tray AR-LC6) The large capacity tray can hold up to 3,500 sheets of A4 size (8-1/2" x 11") SHARP standard paper (80 g/m2 (20 lbs.)). If you wish to change the paper size, please consult your dealer (the paper size must be changed by a service technician). 1 Pull the tray out until it stops. the tray firmly all the way into the 3 Push machine. When the tray is in operation, do not use excessive force to pull the tray out. This may damage the tray. The paper table will automatically rise to the paper feed position. the paper in the centre of the paper 2 Place table. The paper stack must not be higher than the indicator line (up to 3,500 sheets of SHARP standard paper (80 g/m2 (20 lbs.)) If the paper type was changed, be sure to change the appropriate settings as explained in "Setting the paper type and paper size" (See page 2-14). ■ Specifications Name Large capacity tray (AR-LC6) Paper size A4 (8-1/2" x 11") Paper weight 60 to 105 g/m2 (16 to 28 lbs.) Paper capacity (plain) 3500 sheets (80 g/m2 (20 lbs.)) Dimensions 376 mm (W) x 546 mm (D) x 518 mm (H) (14-23/32" (W) x 21-1/2" (D) x 20-13/32" (H)) Power supply Supplied from the main unit Weight Approximately 28.5 kg (62.9 lbs.) Overall dimensions when attached to machine 1347 mm (W) x 679 mm (D) (53-3/64" (W) x 26-47/64" (D)) Specifications are subject to change for improvement without notice. 2-7 2 LOADING PAPER Loading paper in paper tray 5 (optional large capacity tray AR-LC7) An optional large capacity tray (AR-LC7) is available for the machine. The AR-LC7 can hold up to 3000 sheets of 80 g/m2 (20 lbs.) paper. (See the following "Specifications" for the types of paper that can be used in the large capacity tray.) When installed, the AR-LC7 operates as "Tray 5". The AR-LC7 cannot be used together with the AR-LC6 described on page 2-7. ■ Part names Operation button / Indicator To load paper in the tray, press this button, wait until the indicator turns off, and then pull the tray out. Top cover Open this cover to remove a misfeed. ● Load paper in the tray with the print side face up. However, if the paper type is "PRE-PRINTED" or "LETTER HEAD", load the paper with the print side face down*. * If the two-sided function is disabled using "DISABLING OF DUPLEX" in the administrator settings (page 11 of the administrator settings guide), load the paper face up. ■ Specifications Name Large capacity tray (AR-LC7) Paper sizes* A3 (11" x 17"), B4 (8-1/2" x 14"), A4 (8-1/2" x 11"), A4R (8-1/2" x 11"R) Paper weight 60 to 105 g/m2 (16 to 28 lbs.) Number of paper trays /Paper capacity One tray 3000 sheets (80 g/m2 or 20 lbs.) Power supply Supplied from the machine Dimensions 690mm (W) x 587mm (D) x 521.5mm (H) (27-5/32" (W) x 23-7/64" (D) x 20-17/32" (H)) Weight Approx. 50 kg (Approx. 110 lbs.) Paper size display NOTES ● If you wish to change the paper size, please consult your dealer (the paper size must be changed by a service technician). ● Do not use curled or folded paper. This may cause misfeeds. ● When the tray has been pulled out, do not place heavy objects on the tray or press down on the tray. ● Do not place any objects on the large capacity tray or use it instead of a chair or step. This may damage the tray and interfere with the use of the bypass tray. * The indicated sizes of plain paper can be used. When using the AR-LC7, refer also to "More information on plain paper" on page 2-13. Specifications are subject to change for improvement without notice. 2-8 LOADING PAPER ■ Loading paper in the AR-LC7 If the paper runs out during printing, a message will appear in the display. Follow the procedure below to load paper. 1 Pull the tray out until it stops. Pull the finger grip up and pull the tray out until it stops. CAUTION When loading paper, take care not to insert your hands into holes on paper table. Do not insert your hands here. 2 NOTE To add or change paper, press the operation button. When the button is pressed, the indicator will blink until the paper table stops descending. Do not pull the tray out until the indicator turns off. Attempting to pull the tray out when the indicator is blinking or solidly lit may damage the tray. 2 Place the paper on the paper table. The paper stack must not be higher than the indicator line. When the paper tray is pulled out, the paper Indicator table will have line descended to a position where approximately 500 sheets of A4 size (8-1/2" x 11") 80 g/m2 (20 lbs.) paper can be placed. After the paper is placed, the paper table will descend to a position where an additional approximately 500 sheets can be placed. When the paper table has descended all the way, approximately 3000 sheets can be held. If a different type of paper is loaded that was used previously, the paper settings for tray 5 must be changed on the machine. Be sure to change to the appropriate settings as explained in "Setting the paper type and paper size" on page 2-14. NOTES Do not insert objects in the tray or attempt to place spare paper in the tray. This may damage the tray. ● Use SHARP-recommended paper (page 2-22). Special paper cannot be used. the tray firmly all the way into the 3 Push machine. After the tray is pushed in, the indicator will blink until the paper table finishes ascending and then light solidly. 2-9 LOADING PAPER Loading paper in the bypass tray The bypass tray can be used to print on plain paper, postcards, label sheets, tabbed paper, and other special papers. When using SHARP standard paper, up to 100 sheets can be loaded (up to 20 postcards) for continuous printing similar to the other trays. For the paper types that can be used in the bypass tray, see "Specifications of paper trays (Types and sizes of paper that can be used in the trays)" on page 2-12. NOTE After loading the paper in the bypass tray, be sure to set the paper type and size (step 4) if these were changed. 1 Open the bypass tray. the type and size of the paper loaded in 4 Set the bypass tray. If the paper size was changed from an AB size to an inch size, or from an inch size to an AB size, or if the paper type was changed, be sure to change the appropriate settings as explained in "Setting the paper type and paper size" (see page 2-14). When loading A3, B4, A4R, 11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 14", 8-1/2" x 13" or 8-1/2" x 11"R size paper, be sure to pull the auxiliary tray all the way out. If the auxiliary tray is not pulled all the way out, the size of the loaded paper will not be correctly displayed. ■ Loading tabbed paper in the bypass tray [Example] Make sure that the positions of the tabs correspond with the originals as shown below. Original Tabbed paper DEF ABC the bypass tray guides to the width of 2 Set the copy paper. completes the procedure for loading 5 This paper in the bypass tray. GHI Front side JKL 1st page 2nd page 3rd page 4th page Place the tabbed paper face up. the copy paper all the way into the 3 Insert bypass tray. (Do not force the paper in.) Place the copy paper face up. If the bypass tray guides are set wider than the copy paper, the inside of the machine may become soiled, resulting in smudges on succeeding copies. A gap may cause skewing or wrinkling. 2-10 Front 1st page 2nd page 3rd page 4th page LOADING PAPER ■ Important points when using the bypass tray ● Be sure to load A5 paper, 5-1/2" x 8-1/2" paper, and postcards as shown (1) horizontal loading in the diagram below. (1) (2) 2 (1):Horizontal loading (2):Vertical loading ● When loading plain paper other than SHARP standard paper, special media other than postcards, SHARP-recommended transparency film, or paper to be printed on the back, the paper must be loaded one sheet at a time. Loading more than one sheet at a time will cause misfeeds. ● Before loading heavy paper, straighten any curling in the paper. ● When adding paper, remove any paper remaining in the tray, combine it with the paper to be added, and reload as a single stack. ● Do not use paper that has already been printed on by a plain paper fax machine or a laser printer. This may cause printed images to become dirty. ● When printing on transparency film, be sure to remove each sheet as it exits the machine. Allowing sheets to stack in the output tray may cause curling. ● Use only Sharp-recommended transparency film. Transparency film should be loaded in the bypass tray with the label facing down and the film oriented vertically. Smudging and a dirty image may result if the film is placed with the label facing up. Label facing down ● When loading multiple sheets of transparency film in the bypass tray, be sure to fan the sheets several times before loading. ● Use only tabbed sheets that are made of paper. Tabbed sheets made of film or other material cannot be used. 2-11 LOADING PAPER Specifications of paper trays (Types and sizes of paper that can be used in the trays) The specifications for the types and sizes of paper that can be loaded in the paper trays are shown below. Tray No. (tray name) Tray 1 Tray 2 Tray 3 Tray 4 Bypass tray Tray 5 (AR-LC6) Tray 5 (AR-LC7) 2-12 Applicable paper types Applicable paper sizes Plain paper (Refer to the next page A4, 8-1/2" x 11" "More information on plain paper".) A4, 8-1/2" x 11" • When "AUTO-AB" is selected in "Setting the paper type and paper size" (page 2-14), the following paper sizes can be automatically detected: A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5R, 8-1/2" x 13" Plain paper (Refer to the next page "More • When "AUTO-INCH" is selected in "Setting the information on plain paper".) paper type and paper size" (page 2-14), the following paper sizes can be automatically detected: 11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 14", 8-1/2" x 11", 8-1/2" x 11"R, 7-1/4" x 10-1/2"R, 5-1/2" x 8-1/2"R • Non-standard sizes • When "AUTO-AB" is selected in "Setting the paper type and paper size" (page 2-14), the following paper sizes can be automatically detected: Special paper A4, A4R, B5, B5R (only A4 for tabbed paper) (Refer to the • Heavy paper • When "AUTO-INCH" is selected in "Setting the next page "More • Transparency paper type and paper size" (page 2-14), the information on film following paper sizes can be automatically detected: special media • Labels 8-1/2" x 11", 8-1/2" x 11"R (only 8-1/2" x 11" for that can be • Tabbed paper tabbed paper) used".) • Non-standard sizes smaller than A4 or 8-1/2" x 11" • 40 sheets of transparency film can be loaded • Tabbed paper can be used • When "AUTO-AB" is selected in "Setting the paper type and paper size" (page 2-14), the following paper sizes can be automatically detected: A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, 8-1/2" x 13" Plain paper (Refer to the next • When "AUTO-INCH" is selected in "Setting page "More information on plain the paper type and paper size" (page paper".) 2-14), the following paper sizes can be automatically detected: 11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 14", 8-1/2" x 11", 8-1/2" x 11"R, 7-1/4" x 10-1/2"R • Non-standard sizes Same as tray 3. Postcards can also be used. However, • Up to 100 sheets of plain paper can be loaded. • Up to 20 sheets of transparency film can be loaded. • Up to 20 postcards can be loaded. Paper weight 60 to 105 g/m2 (16 to 28 lbs.) 60 to 128 g/m2 (16 to 34 lbs.) See the remarks for special papers on the following page. 60 to 128 g/m2 (16 to 34 lbs.) The same paper as tray 3, and also 52 to 59 g/m2 (14 lbs. to 15 lbs.) thin paper can be used. Same as tray 2. Plain paper (Refer to the next page A3, B4, A4, A4R, 11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 14", 60 to 105 g/m2 "More information on plain paper".) 8-1/2" x 11", 8-1/2" x 11"R (16 to 28 lbs.) LOADING PAPER ■ More information on plain paper Incorrect feeding may result in poor toner fusing (the toner does not adhere to the paper well and can be rubbed off), skewed feeding, misfeeds, or other failures. Plain paper SHARP standard paper (See page 2-22) Paper in AB system Paper in inch system A5 to A3 5-1/2" x 8-1/2" to 11" x 17" 64 g/m2 (17 lbs.) Restrictions on paper other than SHARP standard paper 60 to 105 g/m2 or 16 to 28 lbs. Recycled, coloured, pre-punched, pre-printed and letterhead papers must conform to the same conditions as above. ■ More information on special media that can be used Incorrect feeding may result in poor toner fusing (the toner does not adhere to the paper well and can be rubbed off), skewed feeding, misfeeds, or other failures. Type Remarks Heavy paper • For A5 to A4 or 5-1/2" x 8-1/2" to 8-1/2" x 11" sizes, heavy paper ranging from 106 to 128 g/m2 or 16 to 34 lbs. can be used. • Other heavy papers 176 g/m2 (65 lbs.) can be used. 200 to 205 g/m2 (110 lbs.) can be used but only for A4, 8-1/2" x 11" paper in the portrait orientation. • For A5 or 5-1/2" x 8-1/2" paper, the orientation must be landscape. Transparency film, Tabbed paper • Use SHARP recommended paper. • Use only tabbed sheets that are made of paper. (Tabbed sheets made of film or other material cannot be used.) Postcards • Japanese official postcards can be used. Special paper ■ Paper that can be used for automatic two-sided printing Paper used for automatic two-sided printing (paper that can be fed through the duplex module) must meet the following conditions: Paper type Paper size :Plain paper as specified on page above. :Must be one of the following standard sizes: A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R or A5R (11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 14", 8-1/2" x 13", 8-1/2" x 11", 8-1/2" x 11"R, 7-1/4" x 10-1/2" or 5-1/2" x 8-1/2"R) Paper weight :64 to 128 g/m2 (16 to 34 lbs.)(special heavy papers indicated in the table above) NOTES ● Special papers (explained above) cannot be used for automatic two-sided printing. However, certain special heavy papers (index paper, cover paper) can be used. ● Various types of plain paper and special paper are sold. Some of these cannot be used in the machine. Please consult your retailer or your dealer when buying paper. ● The image quality and toner fusibility of special papers may change due to ambient conditions, operating conditions, and paper characteristics, resulting in image quality inferior to that of SHARP standard paper. 2-13 2 LOADING PAPER Setting the paper type and paper size Follow these steps to change the paper type setting when the paper type has been changed in a paper tray. For the paper types that can be used in each tray, see page 2-12. 1 Press the [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key. The system setting menu screen will appear. PY SYSTEM JOB STATUS SETTINGS 5 Touch the [TYPE / SIZE] key. PER TRAY SETTINGS TYPE / SIZE TRAY 3 PRINT 2 Touch the [PAPER TRAY SETTINGS] key. PAPER TRAY SETTINGS RINT The paper tray selection screen will appear. PLAIN / A4 FAX COPY DOC. FILING I-FAX the type of paper that was loaded in 6 Select the tray. Example: The paper type of tray 3 is selected SYSTEM SETTINGS CANCEL TRAY 3 TYPE/SIZE SETTING SELECT THE PAPER TYPE. 1/2 ATA ORWARD PRINTER CONDITION PLAIN LETTER HEAD PRE-PRINTED PRE-PUNCHED LABELS RECYCLED COLOUR TRANSPARENCY HEAVY PAPER TAB PAPER 1/2 Touch the desired paper type to select it. The paper size setting screen will appear. 3 Touch the [TRAY SETTINGS] key. PAPER TRAY SETTINGS NOTES ● Tabbed paper can only be used in tray 3, bypass tray and the inserter. ● Heavy paper, label sheets, and transparency film cannot be loaded in trays 1, 2, 4, and 5. TRAY SETTINGS the setting screen of the desired 4 Display paper tray. OK TYPE / SIZE FIXED PAPER SIDE 1/8 PLAIN / A4 DISABLE DUPLEX PRINT COPY Touch the appropriate keys (checkboxes). SYSTEM SETTINGS SYSTEM SETTINGS PAPER TRAY SETTINGS TRAY 1 the size of paper that was loaded in 7 Select the tray. FAX I-FAX DOC. FILING TYPE TRAY3 TYPE/SIZE SETTING AUTO-INCH PLAIN AUTO-AB DISABLE STAPLE DISABLE PUNCH Touch the key or key to display the setting screen of the desired paper tray. NOTE To automatically switch to a tray with the same size and type of paper (if there is one) in the event that the paper tray runs out of paper, display the last screen with the key and select [AUTO TRAY SWITCHING]. OK SIZE TYPE SIZE INPUT 11X17,81/2 X14,81/2 X11 81/2 X11R,71/4X101/2,51/2X81/2R A3,A4,A4R,A5R,B4,B5 B5R,216X330(81/2X13) X420 Y297 NON STANDARD SIZE 2/2 [AUTO-INCH] key : Select when you have loaded an inch-based size of paper. [AUTO-AB] key : Select when you have loaded an AB size of paper. [SIZE INPUT] key : Select to directly enter a paper size (see page 2-17). [NON STANDARD SIZE] checkbox : Select when you have loaded a non-standard size of paper (see page 2-17). 2-14 LOADING PAPER SYSTEM SETTINGS NOTE Sizes that can be selected vary depending on the selected paper type. the 8 Touch screen. FAX 2/2 USER TYPE 1 USER TYPE 2 USER TYPE 3 USER TYPE 5 USER TYPE 6 USER TYPE 7 USER TYPE 4 1/2 output functions that can be used 9 Select with the selected tray. COPY SELECT THE PAPER TYPE [OK] key in the size setting You will return to the tray setting screen of step 4. PRINT CANCEL TRAY 3 TYPE/SIZE SETTING I-FAX DOC. FILING Touch the checkboxes under the desired items to select them. paper settings for each tray and 10 Configure then touch the [OK] key to exit. NOTE The size and type of paper loaded in the bypass tray can also be set from the paper setting screen. Touch the [PAPER SELECT] key in the main screen to display the paper selection screen, and then touch the [PAPER SELECT] key of the bypass tray and go to step 5. NOTE When the inserter (option) is selected, printing of faxes and Internet faxes is not possible. ■ User type Select a "User type" when the name of the paper type does not appear in the selections or when you wish to select the tray attributes yourself. Touch the key in step 5 on the previous page to display the user type selection screen and then select a user type. 2-15 2 LOADING PAPER ■ Programming and editing paper types To program or edit the name of a paper type or set paper attributes, follow the steps below. the [PAPER TYPE REGISTRATION] 1 Touch key. OK 4 Set the paper attributes. Touch the checkboxes to the left of the items to select them. CANCEL PAPER TYPE REGISTRATION PAPER TYPE REGISTRATION TYPE NAME the paper type that you wish to 2 Select program or edit. SYSTEM SETTINGS OK PAPER TYPE REGISTRATION SELECT THE PAPER TYPE TO EDIT. TYPE 2 USER TYPE 1 TYPEUSER USER PAPER REGISTRATION USER TYPE 5 USER TYPE 6 USER 3 Touch the [TYPE NAME] key. A character entry screen appears. Enter up to 14 characters. Refer to page 7-29 for the procedure for entering characters. CANCEL PAPER TYPE REGISTRATION No.01 TYPE NAME EXIT No.01 USER TYPE 1 FIXED PAPER SIDE DISABLE DUPLEX DISABLE STAPLE DISABLE PUNCH EXIT USER TYPE 1 FIXED PAPER SIDE DISABLE DUPLEX DISABLE STAPLE DISABLE PUNCH FIXED PAPER SIDE: Select this checkbox when paper is to be loaded print side down in the tray. Make sure a checkmark does not appear when paper is to be loaded print side up. • If the two-sided function is disabled using "DISABLING OF DUPLEX" in the administrator settings (page 11 of the administrator settings guide), load the paper face up. DISABLE DUPLEX: Prohibits two-sided printing. Enable when the backside of the paper cannot be printed on. DISABLE STAPLE: Prohibits stapling. Enable when using special papers such as transparency film and label sheets. DISABLE PUNCH: Prohibits punching. Enable when using special papers such as transparency film and label sheets. NOTES ● Tray attributes depend on the selected paper. ● "FIXED PAPER SIDE" and "DISABLE DUPLEX" cannot be simultaneously enabled. the [EXIT] key to 5 Touch programming/editing procedure. 2-16 exit the LOADING PAPER Setting the paper size when a special size is loaded NOTE Special sizes of paper cannot be loaded in trays 1, 2, 4 and 5. Trays 3 and the bypass tray Inserter (option) steps 1 through 5 of "Setting the 1 Perform paper type and paper size" (see page 2-14). steps 1 through 5 of "Setting the 1 Perform paper type and paper size" (see page 2-14). the [SIZE INPUT] 2 Touch touch the [AB] tab. 2 Touch the [SIZE SELECT] key. OK Y X 420 (148 Y 297 (100 432) key and then The size entry palette appears. 11X17,81/2X14,81/2X 81/2X11R,71/4X101/2,5 A3,A4,A4R,A5R,B B5R AUTO-INCH mm AUTO-AB 297) The size selection screen appears. mm SIZE SELECT INCH AB Touch the key or the key to enter the X (width) and Y (length) dimensions of the paper. 3 X OK Y X 300 (148 Y 100 (100 mm 432) mm 297) 3 Select the desired paper size. SYSTEM SETTINGS INSERTER TYPE/SIZE SETTING PLAIN 4 Touch the [OK] key. X OK Y X 300 (148 Y 100 (100 mm OK 1/2 11X17 81/2X14 81/2X11 81/2X11R 71/4X101/2 51/2X81/2R There are separate screens for inch-based paper selection and AB paper selection. Touch the key or the key to switch between the screens. INCH AB SIZE TYPE X (width) is initially selected. To enter Y (length), touch the [Y] key and then enter the length. TYPE 4 Touch the [OK] key. You will return to the size setting screen of step 2. TYPE You will return to the size setting screen of step 2. OK 432) SIZE mm 1/2 297) 81/2X14 INCH AB paper is a non-standard size, select 5 Ifthethe[NON STANDARD SIZE] checkbox. 1/4X101/2 81/2X11 51/2X81/2R steps 8 through 10 of "Setting the 5 Perform paper type and paper size" (pages 2-15). 11X17,81/2X14,81/2X11 81/2X11R,71/4X101/2,51/2X81/2R A3,A4,A4R,A5R,B4,B5 B5R,216x330(81/2x13) X300 Y100 NON STANDARD SIZE steps 8 through 10 of "Setting the 6 Perform paper type and paper size" (pages 2-15). 2-17 2 SYSTEM SETTINGS The system settings can be used as needed to meet the needs of your workplace. The items that can be set with the system settings are shown below. ● Total count . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The number of pages processed by the machine and optional equipment can be displayed. (See page 2-20) ● Default settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Used to configure the screen contrast, date and time, and keyboard selection*1 settings. (See page 2-20) ● List print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Used to print lists of settings and fonts. (See page 2-20) ● Paper tray settings . . . . . . . . . . . . The paper type, paper size and automatic tray switching can be set for each tray. Automatic tray switching allows feeding to switch between trays loaded with the same type and size of paper. If one tray runs out of paper during printing, printing will continue from the other tray. (See page 2-20) For the detailed descriptions and use of the settings listed below, see the fax, image send, and printer manuals. ● Address control*1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . Used to store information for various functions. ● Sender control*2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Used to store the sender's information that appears on your Scan to E-mail transmissions at the destination. ● Fax data receive/forward*1 . . . . . . Faxes received to memory and received Internet faxes can be forwarded to another destination. ● Printer condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Used to configure default settings for the printer function (see the Operation manual (for printer)). ● Document filing control*2. . . . . . . . . Used to configure default settings for the document filing function. (pages 7-25 to 7-28) ● Administrator settings . . . . . . . . . These are items that are used by the administrator of the machine to configure machine settings. A key appears for these settings in the system settings menu screen. For information on these settings, see the administrator settings guide. *1 These settings can be configured in a system where the facsimile, network scanner and Internet fax function is available. *2 These settings can be configured in a system where the network scanner function is available. General procedure for system settings 1 Press the [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key. The system setting menu screen will appear. PY SYSTEM JOB STATUS SETTINGS Touch the [CLOCK] key and then the following screen appears. SYSTEM SETTINGS CLOCK ADJUST OK YEAR MONTH DAY HOUR MINUTE 2010 04 04 11 30 DAYLIGHT SAVING TIME SETTING the key of the desired 2 Touch display its setting screen. item to The example of selecting the [DEFAULT SETTINGS] key and then the [CLOCK] key is explained below. SYSTEM SETTINGS EXIT TOTAL COUNT DEFAULT SETTINGS LIST PRINT PAPER TRAY SETTINGS ADDRESS CONTROL SENDER CONTROL FAX DATA RECEIVE/FORWARD PRINTER CONDITION DOCUMENT FILING CONTROL ADMINISTRATOR SETTINGS The system settings are described in detail on the following pages. 3 Touch the [CLOCK] key. 2-18 DATE FORMAT the year, month, day, hour or minute 4 Touch key, and then use the or key to adjust the setting. ●If you select a non-existent date (for example, Feb. 30), the [OK] key will grey out to prevent entry of the date. ●Select [DAYLIGHT SAVING TIME SETTING] checkbox to have the time automatically change at the beginning and end of daylight saving time. SYSTEM SETTINGS 5 Touch the [DATE FORMAT] key. The following screen appears. SYSTEM SETTINGS OK DATE FORMAT 2010/04/04/SUN 11:30 MM/DD/YYYY DAY-NAME POSITION FIRST 12-HOUR DD/MM/YYYY LAST 24-HOUR YYYY/MM/DD More information on setting procedures In the following type of screen, a setting is selected by touching the key so that a checkmark ( ) appears. The settings below are configured to allow use of tray 1 in print, copy, and fax modes. To display the next screen, touch the or keys. SYSTEM SETTINGS OK PAPER TRAY SETTINGS TYPE / SIZE TRAY1 FIXED PAPER SIDE 1/8 PLAIN / A4 DISABLE DUPLEX wish to change the format of the date 6 Ifandyoutime, touch the desired format keys. PRINT COPY FAX I-FAX DOC. FILING 2 DISABLE STAPLE DISABLE PUNCH Touched keys are highlighted. The selected format is applied to lists printed out in "LIST PRINT". 7 Touch the [OK] key. You will return to the date and time setting screen. OK AME ON T 12-HOUR 8 Touch the [OK] key. 9 To exit the settings, touch the [EXIT] key. SYSTEM SETTINGS EXIT TOTAL COUNT DEFAULT SETTINGS LIST PRINT PAPER TRAY SETTINGS ADDRESS CONTROL SENDER CONTROL FAX DATA RECEIVE/FORWARD PRINTER CONDITION DOCUMENT FILING CONTROL ADMINISTRATOR SETTINGS 2-19 SYSTEM SETTINGS About the settings ■ Total count ■ List print This displays the following sheet counts (the counts that can be displayed vary depending on the options installed): This is used to print lists of machine settings and a test page to check resident fonts. The following lists and pages are available: Number of pages output by the machine. Number of original pages transmitted by the machine. 3 Number of times the automatic document feeder was used to feed original pages and number of times the stapler was used (if installed). 4 Number of pages stored by document filing. In the case of 1 only, ●A3 (11" x 17") size paper is counted as two sheets. ●Each sheet of paper used for automatic twosided copying is counted as two sheets (A3 (11" x 17") paper is counted as four sheets). ●Paper with an entered size of 384 mm (15-1/8") or larger is counted as two sheets (four sheets during automatic two-sided copying). ●All custom setting list Shows the hardware status, software status, printer configuration settings, tray settings, and counts. ●Printer test page Shows the PCL symbol set list, fonts, network interface (NIC interface) settings, and settings used for the NIC card. ●Sending address list One touch destination list, group list, program list, and memory box list. ●Document filing user / folder list Shows the user names and folder names for document filing. ●Sender control list Shows the senders that have been stored. 1 2 ■ Default settings NOTE The following settings can be configured: ●Display contrast Screen contrast adjustment is used to make the LCD touch panel easier to view under various lighting conditions. Touch the [LIGHTER] key to make the screen lighter, or the [DARKER] key to make the screen darker. ●Clock Use this to set the date and time in the machine's built-in clock. This clock is used by functions that require date and time information. ●Keyboard select The layout of the keyboard that appears in letter entry screens can be changed. Select the arrangement of the letter keys that you find easiest to use. The following three alphabet configurations are available: keyboard ● Keyboard 1 (QWERT... configuration)* ● Keyboard 2 (AZERTY...configuration) ● Keyboard 3 (ABCDEF...configuration) * The default setting is "Keyboard 1". (Example: Character entry Keyboard 3 is selected) screen ABC 2-20 when abc A test page cannot be printed if "PROHIBIT TEST PAGE PRINTING" (See the "Operation manual (for printer)".) has been set to "prohibited" in the administrator settings. ■ Paper tray settings The paper type, paper size, enabled modes and automatic tray switching can be set for each tray. See page 2-14 for details on setting the paper type and paper size. Automatic switching to another paper tray is used to automatically switch to another tray with the same size and type of paper in the event that the paper runs out during continuous printing. This requires that the trays be loaded with the same size of paper. The paper tray settings can be enabled or disabled for each tray, and for printer mode, copy mode, fax mode, Internet fax mode, and document filing mode. To enable any function, touch the check box key so that a checkmark ( ) appears. REPLACING THE TONER CARTRIDGES When toner runs low, a message will appear to inform you that the toner cartridge must be replaced. NOTE To view the approximate amount of toner remaining, hold down the [COPY] key during printing or when the machine is on standby. The percentage of toner remaining will appear in the display while you hold down the key. When the percentage falls to "20-0%" , obtain a new toner cartridge and keep it ready for replacement. Follow the steps below to replace the toner cartridge. 1 Open the front cover. Shake the toner cartridge horizontally. Do not rotate it as shown at left. 4 Insert the new toner cartridge. Align the toner cartridge with the insert hole and push it in as shown. Do not rotate the cartridge. 2 Remove the toner cartridge gently. the cartridge in until it locks securely 5 Push in place. Hold the toner cartridge with both hands as shown in the illustration, and pull it out of the machine. the new toner cartridge from the 3 Remove box and shake it five or six times 6 Close the front cover. horizontally. NOTE Shake the toner cartridge well to ensure that the toner flows well and will not stick to the inside of the cartridge. CAUTION ● Do not throw the toner cartridge into a fire. Toner may fly and cause burns. ● Store toner cartridges out of the reach of small children. NOTE Place the used toner cartridge in the plastic bag and store it. When placing the toner cartridge in the bag, insert it horizontally, not vertically. If the cartridge is stood on end, the collected used toner may spill out and soil the floor or your clothes. 2-21 2 STORAGE OF SUPPLIES Standard supplies for this product that can replaced by the user include paper, toner cartridges, and staple cartridges for the finisher. For best copying results, be sure to use only Sharp Genuine Supplies which are designed, engineered, and tested to maximize the life and performance of Sharp products. Look for the Genuine Supplies label on the toner package. GENUINE SUPPLIES ■ Proper storage 1. ● ● ● Store the supplies in a location that is: clean and dry, at a stable temperature, not exposed to direct sunlight. 2. Store paper in the wrapper and lying flat. 3. Paper stored in packages standing up or out of the wrapper may curl or become damp, resulting in paper misfeeds. 4. Store a new toner cartridge box horizontally. Do not store it standing on end. If stored standing on end, the toner may not distribute well even after shaking the cartridge vigorously, and will remain inside the cartridge without flowing out. Supply and Consumables The supply of spare parts for a repair of the appliance is guaranteed for at least 7 years following the termination of production. Spare parts are those parts of the apparatus which may break down within the scope of the ordinary use of the product - whereas those parts which normally exceed the life of the product are not to be considered as spare parts. Consumables too, are available for 7 years following the termination of production. 2-22 MISFEED REMOVAL When a misfeed has occurred during printing, the message "A MISFEED HAS OCCURRED". will appear in the touch panel display of the operation panel and printing including copying and facsimile output will stop. The approximate misfeed locations are indicated with " " shown in the illustration below. The page numbers for detailed information on misfeed removal are also shown. 1 Misfeed in the transport area, fusing area, and exit area (See page 2-24) 2 Misfeed in the automatic document feeder (See page 2-31) 3 When feeding paper from tray 2, the bypass tray, or tray 5, this mark may blink. When the mark blinks, check the following diagrams: ● Fourth diagram in step 3 on page 2-26 ● Diagram in step 6 on page 2-27 ● Diagram in step 8 on page 2-29, 2-30 4 Misfeed in the bypass tray (See page 2-28) 5 Misfeed in the finisher (See page 3-11) 6 Misfeed in the saddle stitch finisher (See page 3-11) 7 Misfeed in the inserter (See page 3-17) 8 Misfeed in the tray 3 (See page 2-27) 9 Misfeed in the tray 4 (See page 2-27) 10 Misfeed in tray 1 - tray 2 (See page 2-26) 11 Misfeed in the tray 5 (See page 2-29, 2-30) NOTE Printing is not possible when a misfeed occurs, and thus any faxes or Internet faxes received at this time will be temporarily held in memory. The faxes will print out automatically as soon as the misfeed is cleared. NOTES ● Do not damage or touch the photoconductive drum. (See page 2-24.) ● Be careful not to tear the misfed paper during removal. ● lf paper is accidentally torn during removal, be sure to remove all pieces. CAUTION The fusing unit is hot. Take care in removing paper. Fusing unit Misfeed removal guidance Misfeed removal guidance can be displayed by touching the [INFORMATION] key on the touch panel after a misfeed has occurred. INFORMATION 2-23 2 MISFEED REMOVAL Misfeed in the transport area, fusing area, and exit area CAUTION Misfed in the fusing area Turn roller rotating knob B in the direction of the arrow to remove the misfed paper. o The fusing unit is hot. Take care in removing paper. (Do not touch the metal parts.) 1 Remove the duplex unit. Grasp the finger hold and gently open the unit. Roller rotating knob B CAUTION The fusing unit is hot. Take care in removing paper. (Do not touch any metal parts.) 2 Remove the misfed paper as shown in the illustrations below. Misfed in the transport area Turn roller rotating knob A in the direction of the arrow to remove the misfed paper. Fusing unit open tab If the misfed paper is inside the fusing area, turn down the fusing unit open tab to open the fusing unit and remove the misfed paper. Roller rotating knob A NOTES Do not touch or damage the transfer roller. Transfer roller Do not touch or damage the photoconductive drum. After clearing the misfeed, promptly Photoconductive drum close the duplex unit. Leaving the unit open may adversely affect the photo-sensitive drum and cause poor copy quality. 2-24 Misfed in the exit area Be careful not to tear the misfed paper during removal. 3 Gently close the duplex unit. After closing, confirm that the misfeed message has been cleared and the normal display appears. MISFEED REMOVAL Misfeed in the duplex unit 1 Remove the duplex unit. 4 Close the cover of the duplex unit. Grasp the finger hold and gently open the unit. 2 Open the cover of the duplex unit. 5 Gently close the duplex unit. After closing the duplex unit, confirm that the misfeed message has been cleared and the normal display appears. the misfed paper. 3 Remove Misfeed in upper part of unit Be careful not to tear the misfed paper during removal. Misfeed in lower part of unit Be careful not to tear the misfed paper during removal. 2-25 2 MISFEED REMOVAL Misfeed in the paper feed area NOTE Be sure to follow the misfeed removal sequence. Do not pull the tray out immediately as the misfeed may have occurred with paper partially fed out of the tray. Open the left cover and see if there is misfed paper first (steps 1 and 2). If you open the tray without checking, the partially fed paper may tear and leave torn pieces in the machine, increasing the difficulty of removal. ■ Misfeed in paper tray 1 - tray 2 1 Remove the duplex unit. ●If paper is misfed in tray 2 (right-side tray)... Grasp the finger hold and gently open the unit. 2 Remove the misfed paper. Turn roller rotating knob A in the direction of the arrow to remove the misfed paper. When using tray 2, check the paper transfer unit inside the tray and remove any misfed paper. 4 Gently close paper tray 1 - tray 2. Roller rotating knob A Push the tray all the way back in. NOTE A misfeed may occur inside the compartment, so please check the entire compartment carefully. paper is not found in step 2, pull 3 Ifoutmisfed paper tray 1 - tray 2 and remove the misfed paper. Grasp the finger hold and gently open the unit. Pull the tray all the way out until it stops. ●If paper is misfed in tray 1 (left-side tray)... Lift the paper guide and remove the misfed paper. Be sure to replace the paper guide in its original position after removing the paper. 2-26 5 Gently close the duplex unit. After closing, confirm that the misfeed message has been cleared and the normal display appears. MISFEED REMOVAL ■ Misfeed in paper tray 3 1 Remove the duplex unit. the lower cover on the left side of 5 Close the machine. Grasp the finger hold and gently open the unit. 2 Remove the misfed paper. Turn roller rotating knob A in the direction of the arrow to remove the misfed paper. misfed paper is not found in step 3, pull out 6 Ifpaper tray 3 and remove the misfed paper. Pull the tray all the way out until it stops. Check the paper transfer unit inside the tray. Be careful not to tear the misfed paper during removal. Roller rotating knob A the lower cover on the left side of the 3 Open machine. 7 Gently close paper tray 3. Grasp the finger hold and gently open the unit. 4 Remove the misfed paper. Push the tray all the way back in. 8 Gently close the duplex unit. Be careful not to tear the misfed paper during removal. After closing, confirm that the misfeed message has been cleared and the normal display appears. NOTE A misfeed may occur inside the compartment, so please check the entire compartment carefully. ■ Misfeed in the tray 4 To remove a misfeed in tray 4, follow the same steps as in "Misfeed in paper tray 3". 2-27 2 MISFEED REMOVAL ■ Misfeed in the bypass tray the misfed paper from the bypass 1 Remove tray. Be careful not to tear the misfed paper during removal. did not find a misfeed in step 1, open 2 Iftheyouside cover and remove the misfeed. 3 Gently close the side cover. 4 Remove tray 1 - tray 2. Grasp the finger hold and gently open the unit. Pull the tray all the way out until it stops. NOTE If a misfeed occurs during printing from the bypass tray while paper is being loaded in tray 1 - tray 2, push tray 1 - tray 2 back in to close it, and then pull the tray out again. 2-28 5 Remove the misfed paper. Check the paper transfer unit inside the tray and remove any misfed paper. 6 Gently close paper tray 1 - tray 2. Push the tray all the way back in. Make sure that the misfeed message no longer appears (the normal message display should appear). MISFEED REMOVAL ■ Misfeed in the tray 5 (AR-LC6) 1 Open the side cover. the top cover and remove the misfed 6 Open paper. After removing the misfed paper, close the top cover. 2 Remove the misfed paper. Be careful not to tear the misfed paper during removal. 3 Gently close the side cover. 2 7 Remove tray 1 - tray 2. Grasp the finger hold and gently open the unit. Pull the tray all the way out until it stops. NOTE If a misfeed occurs in the following situation, push tray 1 - tray 2 back in to close it and then pull the tray out again: ● A misfeed occurs during printing from tray 5 while paper is being loaded in tray 1 or tray 2. 8 Remove the misfed paper. 4 Close the bypass tray. Check the paper transfer unit inside the tray and remove any misfed paper. 9 Gently close paper tray 1 - tray 2. 5 Open the top cover of tray 5. Push the tray all the way back in. Make sure that the misfeed message no longer appears (the normal message display should appear). 2-29 MISFEED REMOVAL ■ Misfeed in the tray 5 (AR-LC7) If a paper misfeed occurs, follow the steps below to remove the misfeed. 1 Open the side cover. 6 Remove the misfed paper. Be careful not to tear the misfed paper during removal. After removing the misfed paper, close the top cover. 2 Remove the misfed paper. 7 Pull out tray 1 - tray 2. Be careful not to tear the misfed paper during removal. Grasp the finger hold and gently open the tray. Pull the tray all the way out until it stops. 3 Gently close the side cover. NOTE If a misfeed occurs in the following situation, push tray 1 - tray 2 back in and then pull the tray out again: ● A misfeed occurs during printing from tray 5 (ARLC7) while paper is being loaded in tray 1 - tray 2. 8 Remove the misfed paper. Check the paper transfer unit inside the tray. If there is a misfeed in the paper transfer unit, remove the misfeed. 4 Close the bypass tray. 9 Gently push tray 1-tray 2 into the machine. 5 Open the top cover of the AR-LC7 (tray 5). Hold the top cover open. 2-30 Push the tray firmly all the way into the machine. Make sure that the misfeed message no longer appears (the normal message display should appear). REMOVING AN ORIGINAL MISFEED Removing a misfed original from the automatic document feeder If an original misfeed occurs in the automatic document feeder, follow the steps below to remove the misfed original. NOTES ● For misfeed removal in the main unit and other peripheral devices, see page 2-23 ● When a misfeed occurs, touch the [INFORMATION] key to display detailed information for misfeed removal. Check locations A and B in the diagram at left to remove the original. 2 1 Removing misfeeds from each location. ● Check location A Open the document feeder cover and gently remove the misfed original without tearing it. Close the document feeder cover. and 2 Open cover. close the document feeder Opening and closing the cover clears the misfeed display. Copying cannot be resumed until this step is performed. However, this step is not necessary after a misfeed is removed from location B. A message may appear indicating the number of originals which must be returned to the document feeder tray. Return the originals to the document feeder tray and press the [START] key. ● Check location B ● Misfeed in the transfer unit Open the document transfer cover, hold the paper guide open, and remove the misfed original. ● Misfeed in the document exit unit Open the document transfer cover. Rotate the transfer roller in the direction of the arrow and gently remove the original without tearing it. 2-31 TROUBLESHOOTING Check the following troubleshooting list before requesting service as many problems can be fixed by the user. If you are unable to solve the problem by checking the list, turn off the main power switch and the power switch, unplug the power cord. Problems related to general use of the machine are described below. For problems related to the copy function, see page 6-3. For problems related to document filing, see page 7-31. For fax, printer, and network scanner/Internet fax problems, see the manuals for those functions. For peripheral device problems, see the explanation of the device. If the message "CALL FOR SERVICE. CODE:**-**"(Note) appears in the touch panel, turn off the main power switch and the power switch, wait about 10 seconds, and then turn the main power switch and the power switch back on. If the message still appears after turning the main power switch and the power switch off and on several times, it is likely that a failure has occurred that requires service. In this event, stop using the machine, unplug the power cord, and contact your Sharp dealer. Note: Letters and numbers appear in "**-**". When you contact your Sharp dealer, please tell your dealer what letters and numbers appear. Problem Check Solution or cause Machine plugged in? Plug the machine into a grounded outlet. The main power switch and power switch are not turned on? Turn on the main power switch and the power switch. (Page 1-17) READY indicator off? The printer is warming up. (Warm-up time is approximately 120 seconds.) Wait until the READY indicator lights up. Message indicating need to load paper displayed? Load paper. (Page 2-2) Message indicating need to replace the toner cartridge displayed? Replace the toner cartridge. (Page 2-21) Message indicating a paper misfeed displayed? Remove misfed paper. (Page 2-23) Copying/printing is not possible. A message appears saying that this type of paper cannot be used for two-sided copying. Two-sided printing is not possible on special paper. Use paper that can be used for automatic two-sided printing. (Page 2-13) Incorrect bypass tray paper size. Incorrect display of paper sizes , A3, B4, A4R, 11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 14", 8-1/2" x 13" or 8-1/2" x 11"R only. When loading sizes A3, B4, A4R, 11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 14", 8-1/2" x 13" or 8-1/2" x 11"R, be sure to open the tray extension. The number of sheets placed on the bypass tray exceeds the maximum number. Do not place more than the maximum number of sheets. The bypass guide is not adjusted to the size of the loaded paper. Adjust the bypass guide to the size of the loaded paper. The machine does not operate. Copying/printing on paper from the bypass tray is skewed. 2-32 TROUBLESHOOTING Problem Paper from bypass misfeeds. the tray Printing stops before the job is finished. Check Solution or cause The paper size and paper type have not been set. Be sure to set the paper size and paper type when using special size or special type papers. (Page 2-14) The number of sheets placed on the bypass tray exceeds the maximum number. Do not place more than the maximum number of sheets. The bypass guide is not adjusted to the size of the loaded paper. Adjust the bypass guide to the size of the loaded paper. If too many pages collect on the output tray, the tray full sensor activates and Remove the paper from the output tray. stops printing. 2 The paper tray is out of paper. Load paper. (Page 2-2) Smudges on printed sheets Does a message appear indicating the need for maintenance? Please contact the your dealer as soon as possible. The displayed paper size or paper type does not match the loaded paper size or paper type. When loading paper, if you change the paper size from an AB size to an inch size, or from an The correct paper size or paper type is inch size to an AB size, or change the paper not set in the paper tray settings of the type, be sure to set the new paper type as system settings. explained in "Setting the paper type and paper size" (see page 2-14). When printing on a special size of paper, part of the printed image is missing. The paper size setting is not set correctly in the paper tray settings of the system settings. When using a special size of paper, set the correct paper size as explained in "Setting the paper type and paper size" on page 2-14. If the paper size setting is not correct, part of the image may be cut off or the image may not be printed. The paper size is not set correctly in the special size settings for the bypass tray. When using a special size of paper, set the correct paper size as explained in "Setting the paper type and paper size" on page 2-14. If the paper size setting is not correct, part of the image may be cut off or the image may not be printed. Is paper other than SHARPrecommended paper being used? Use SHARP-recommended paper. (Page 2-22) Paper curled or damp? Do not use curled or crimped paper. If you will not use the paper for a long time, remove the paper from the tray and store it in the wrapper in a cool and dark location so that it will not absorb moisture. Is the paper curled and does it frequently misfeed in the finisher or saddle stitch finisher? Paper may be curled when output depending on the paper type and quality. In some cases turning the paper over in the tray will reduce misfeeding due to curling. When printing on a special size of paper using the bypass tray, part of the printed image is missing. Paper misfeeds frequently. fed Remove the paper from the paper tray or the bypass tray, fan the paper as shown in the illustration, and then load it again. The paper in the tray is not stacked evenly. Make sure that the paper in the paper tray is stacked evenly. If the stack is not even, paper misfeeds will occur. Multiple sheets simultaneously? of paper 2-33 TROUBLESHOOTING Problem Printed paper is wrinkled or the image rubs off easily. The contrast on the touch panel is too high or too low. Printing takes place on the wrong side of the paper. Marks appear at regular intervals on printed pages. 2-34 Check Solution or cause Is paper other than SHARPrecommended paper being used? Use SHARP-recommended paper. (Page 2-22) Is the paper size or weight outside the specifications? Use paper within the specifications. Paper damp? Be sure to store paper in the wrapper in a dry location and do not store paper in a location that is ●humid ●at a high temperature or an extremely low temperature ●exposed to direct sunlight ●dusty. Is LCD contrast properly adjusted? Adjust the screen contrast using "DISPLAY CONTRAST" in "DEFAULT SETTINGS" of the system settings. (Page 2-20) The paper is loaded in the tray with the print side face down*. * Face up if the paper type is "PREPRINTED" or "LETTER HEAD". Load paper in the tray with the print side face up. However, if the paper type is "PRE-PRINTED" or "LETTER HEAD", load the paper with the print side face down*. * If the two-sided function has been prohibited using "DISABLING OF DUPLEX" in the administrator settings (page 11 of the administrator settings guide), load the paper face up. Paper with punch holes is being used. If the original image overlaps the punch holes, marks will appear at the position of the holes on the back of the paper after one-sided printing, or on the front and back of the paper after two-sided printing. Make sure that the original image does not overlap the punch holes. CHAPTER 3 PERIPHERAL DEVICES This chapter explains the procedures for using the optional finisher, saddle stitch finisher, and inserter, as well as Sharp OSA (application communication module and external account module). Page FINISHER AND SADDLE STITCH FINISHER........................................ 3-2 ● Part names...................................................................................... 3-2 ● Specifications .................................................................................. 3-2 ● Finishing methods ........................................................................... 3-4 ● Finishing modes and finisher functions ........................................... 3-6 ● Staple cartridge replacement and staple jam removal .................... 3-7 ● Removing a misfeed........................................................................ 3-11 ● Troubleshooting finisher/saddle stitch finisher problems ................. 3-13 INSERTER .............................................................................................. 3-14 ● Part names...................................................................................... 3-14 ● Specifications .................................................................................. 3-14 ● Loading paper ................................................................................. 3-15 ● Manual operation of the inserter ..................................................... 3-15 ● Misfeed removal .............................................................................. 3-17 ● Troubleshooting inserter problems .................................................. 3-18 SHARP OSA ........................................................................................... 3-19 APPLICATION COMMUNICATION MODULE (MX-AMX2)..................... 3-19 ● Standard application setup.............................................................. 3-19 ● Selecting a standard application ..................................................... 3-19 ● Operation in OSA mode .................................................................. 3-20 EXTERNAL ACCOUNT MODULE (MX-AMX3) ...................................... 3-21 ● External account application setup ................................................. 3-21 ● Operation in external account mode ............................................... 3-21 3-1 FINISHER AND SADDLE STITCH FINISHER The finisher and the saddle stitch finisher include the offset function, which offsets each set of copies from the preceding set for easy separation. Each set of sorted copies can also be stapled. The saddle stitch finisher can automatically staple a set of copies at the centre line and fold the pages to create a pamphlet. A punch module unit can be installed to add punch holes to copies, and an inserter can be installed to insert blank pages at specified pages. In the following explanations, the finisher and saddle stitch finisher are referred to simply as "finisher". Part names 1 2 3 Finisher (AR-F15) 4 Saddle stitch finisher (AR-F16) 5 6 7 Saddle stitch finisher (AR-F16) Finisher (AR-F15) * Tray Offset pages and stapled pages are delivered here. Stapler compiler Paper to be stapled is stacked temporarily. Top cover Open for misfeed removal. Punch module (Option) Adds punch holes to printed pages. Front cover Open to replace the staple case in the staple unit or clear jammed staples. Lower cover Open to clear misfed paper or replace the staple cartridge in the pamphlet unit. (AR-F16 only) Saddle stitch tray Saddle stitched output is delivered here. (AR-F16 only) The illustrations on the following pages (to page 3-18) show the AR-F16; however, the operation of the AR-F15 is the same as the AR-F16. NOTES ● Do not press on the finisher. ● Use caution when near the offset tray during printing as the tray moves up and down. Specifications Name Number of trays Paper output Paper capacity 3-2 Finisher (AR-F15) 2 Saddle stitch finisher (AR-F16) 3 Face down output Upper paper tray/Middle paper tray: Upper paper tray/Middle paper tray: Non-stapling: Non-stapling: 2000 sheets of paper or total aggregate 2000 sheets of paper or total aggregate thickness thickness is within 250mm (9-53/64"): is within 250mm (9-53/64"): A4, B5, A5R, 8-1/2" x A4, B5, A5R, 8-1/2" x 11" or 5-1/2" x 8-1/2"R 11" or 5-1/2" x 8-1/2"R, (80 g/m2 (20 lbs.)) (80 g/m2 (20 lbs.)) 1000 sheets of paper or total aggregate thickness is 1000 sheets of paper or total aggregate within 140mm (5-1/2"): Sizes other than the above thickness is within 140mm (5-1/2"): Stapling: Sizes other than the above 100 sets or 750 pages or total aggregate thickness is Stapling: within 110mm (4-5/16") of A4, B5 or 8-1/2" x 11" paper. 100 sets or 750 pages of A4, B5 or 8-1/2" 100 sets or 500 pages or total aggregate thickness x 11" paper. is within 74mm (2-29/32") of other sizes of paper 100 sets or 500 pages of other sizes of Lower tray: paper Stapled print capacity is (11 - 15) sheets x 10 sets, (6 - 10) sheets x 20 sets, (1 - 5) sheets x 25 sets. (Continued on next page) FINISHER AND SADDLE STITCH FINISHER Upper paper tray/Middle paper tray: A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5R, 11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 14", 8-1/2" x 13", 8-1/2" x 11", 81/2" x 11"R, 7-1/4" x 10-1/2"R, 5-1/2" x 81/2"R Paper size Paper weight Paper full detection Paper sizes for which offset is possible Allowed paper sizes for stapling Maximum number of sheets for stapling Stapling positions Paper conveying Power supply Dimensions Weight Overall dimensions when attached to machine Upper paper tray/Middle paper tray: 60 to 256 g/m2 (16 to 68* lbs.) Both upper and lower tray Upper paper tray/Middle paper tray: A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5R, 11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 14", 8-1/2" x 13", 8-1/2" x 11", 8-1/2" x 11"R, 7-1/4" x 10-1/2"R, 5-1/2" x 8-1/2"R Lower tray: A3, B4, A4R, 11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 11"R Upper paper tray/Middle paper tray/Lower tray: 60 to 256 g/m2 (16 to 68* lbs.) Upper, middle and lower tray A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, 11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 14", 8-1/2" x 13", 8-1/2" x 11", 8-1/2" x 11"R Upper paper tray/Middle paper tray: A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, 11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 14", 8-1/2" x 13", 8-1/2" x 11", 8-1/2" x 11"R Upper paper tray/Middle paper tray: A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, 11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 14", 8-1/2" x 13", 8-1/2" x 11", 8-1/2" x 11"R Lower tray: A3, B4, A4R, 11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 11"R See "Staple sort mode" on 3-4 page 1 place at back, 1 place at back (diagonal), one place at front (diagonal), 2 places Centre reference Supplied from machine When tray is folded up: 648 mm (W) x 630 mm (D) x1150 mm(H) (25-33/64" (W) x 24-13/16" (D) x 45-9/32" (H)) When tray is extended: 773 mm (W) x 630 mm (D) x1150 mm(H) (30-7/16" (W) x 24-13/16" (D) x 45-9/32" (H)) Not including stopper (40 mm (1-37/64")) when attached to machine Approx. 51 kg (Approx. 113 lbs.) Approx. 71 kg (Approx. 157 lbs.) 773 mm (W) x 630 mm (D) (Separation from machine 400 mm) (30-7/16" (W) x 24-13/16" (D) (Separation from machine 15-3/4")) *For index paper, equivalent to 140-lbs. Name Model*1 Number of holes Paper sizes punching Paper weight Power supply Dimensions Weight for Punch module AR-PN4A 2 A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, hole 11"x17", 8-1/2"x14", 8-1/2"x13", 8-1/2"x11", 8-1/2"x11"R AR-PN4B*2 AR-PN4C*3 AR-PN4D*3 3 or 2 4 4 3 holes: A3, A4, A3, A4 A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, 11" x 17", B5R, 8-1/2" x 11" 11"x17", 8-1/2"x14", 8-1/2"x13", 2 holes: 8-1/2"x14", 8-1/2"x11", 8-1/2"x13", 8-1/2"x11"R 8-1/2" x 11"R 2 60 to 256 g/m (16 to 68 lbs.) Supplied from finisher / saddle stitch finisher 95 mm (W) x 560 mm (D) x 170 mm (H) (3-3/4" (W) x 22-1/16" (D) x 6-45/64" (H)) Approx. 3.5 kg (Approx. 7.8 lbs.) *1 Multiple punch modules cannot be installed together. Some models may not be available in some regions. *2 With AR-PN4B, two or three holes can be punched depending on the paper size. *3 With AR-PN4C and AR-PN4D, the number of holes is the same. The hole interval, however, is not the same. Specifications are subject to change for improvement without notice. NOTES ● The following papers cannot be stapled and punched: Special papers such as transparency film and label sheets ● If mixed paper sizes are selected for stapling jobs, stapling will be automatically cancelled. ■ Supplies The finisher and saddle stitch finisher require the following staple cartridge: ● Staple cartridge for finisher (approx. 5,000 per cartridge X 3 cartridges) SF-SC11 ● Staple cartridge for saddle stitch finisher (approx. 2000 per cartridge X 3 cartridges) AR-SC3 3-3 3 FINISHER AND SADDLE STITCH FINISHER Finishing methods ■ Sort mode ■ Offset mode Sorted sets will be delivered. Offset mode Original Printouts ■ Group mode Groups of copies of the same page will be delivered. Original Non-offset mode Printouts Each set of copies is offset from the preceding set to allow easy separation. (The offset function operates in the finisher / saddle stitch finisher tray.) The offset function cannot be selected when the staple sort function is selected. Offset width : Approx. 30 mm (Approx. 1-3/16") ■ Staple sort mode Output pages are sorted into sets by the sort function, and each set is stapled and delivered to the tray. The centre of the paper can also be stapled and delivered to the lower saddle tray (only when using the saddle stitch finisher). The relations between possible stapling positions, the paper feed direction, paper sizes that can be used, and number of pages that can be stapled are shown below. Two sheets (one sheet when using the saddle stitch function) of 256 g/m2 (68 lbs.) paper can be included as covers in the page stapling limit in the table below. Stapling positions Top left corner of printouts Portrait orientation Available paper sizes: A4, B5 and 8-1/2" x 11" Stapling capacity: For each size, up to 50 sheets can be stapled Landscape orientation Available paper sizes: A3, B4, 11" x 17" Stapling capacity: For each size, up to 30 sheets can be stapled Available paper sizes: A4R, 8-1/2" x 14", 8-1/2" x 13", 8-1/2" x 11"R Stapling capacity: For each size, up to 30 sheets can be stapled Lower left corner of printouts Same as above Available paper sizes: A3, B4, A4R, 11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 14", 8-1/2" x 13", 8-1/2" x 11"R Stapling capacity: For each size, up to 30 sheets can be stapled Centre left two positions of printouts Same as above Same as above Saddle stitch on centrefold line. (only when using the saddle stitch finisher) Paper in the portrait direction cannot be saddle stitched. Available paper sizes: A3, B4, A4R, 11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 11"R, Stapling capacity: For each size, up to 15 sheets can be stapled 3-4 FINISHER AND SADDLE STITCH FINISHER ■ Original orientation when using the staple sort or punch function When using the staple sort or punch function, the original must be placed in the following orientations to enable stapling or punching in the desired position on the paper. Staple sort Document feeder Punch Document glass Document feeder Document glass 3 ■ Saddle stitch function (only saddle stitch finisher) The saddle stitch finisher can automatically place two staples for centreline binding of prints or copies and fold them along the centreline. 6 4 2 7 9 11 ■ Hole punching (only if a punch module is installed) When the optional punch module is installed, holes can be punched in printed pages. (When using the saddle stitch finisher, pamphlet style stapling and the punch function cannot be used together.) When using the punch function, automatic rotation of the original image does not operate. For the allowed paper sizes for punching, see the specifications on page 3-3. When using the punch function in copy mode, place the original with the top toward the inside of the machine. If the original is not placed in this orientation, punching will not take place at the correct positions. (See "Standard original placement orientations" on page 4-4.) {Original 1} {Punch positions} {Original 2} {Punch positions} 3-5 FINISHER AND SADDLE STITCH FINISHER Finishing modes and finisher functions Touch the [OUTPUT] key on the main screen of copy mode to display the screen that allows selection of sort, staple sort, group function, centreline stapling, and the output tray. 0 OUTPUT SORT FINISHER TRAY STAPLE SORT GROUP 1 [GROUP] key (See page 3-4.) SADDLE STITCH 6 If the centre tray is selected, output paper will be delivered to the exit tray located above the main unit. 7 [SORT] key (See page 3-4.) [FINISHER TRAY] key (See page 3-2.) When the offset function is selected, output is delivered offset to the finisher tray. (The finisher tray is automatically selected when the staple sort function is turned on.) 9 [OFFSET] key (See page 3-4.) The offset function operates when a checkmark appears in this key. (The offset checkmark is automatically cleared when the staple sort function is enabled.) 3-6 [SADDLE STITCH] key (See page 3-5.) This is displayed when the saddle stitch finisher is installed, and is used to staple pages at the centre and fold them in half to create a pamphlet. Touch this key to display the pamphlet copy setting screen (page 5-6). (This is only possible when the [AUTOMATIC SADDLE STITCH] checkbox is selected in the administrator settings (see page 12 of the administrator settings guide).) When Sort is selected, sets of copies will be collated. 5 [OK] key Touch to close the [OUTPUT] screen and return to the main screen. 8 4 [CENTRE TRAY] key [STAPLE SORT] key (See page 3-4.) When Staple Sort is selected, sorted sets will be stapled and delivered to the offset tray. (They will not be offset stacked.) Select from three stapling positions. 3 PUNCH OFFSET When Group is selected, copies will be grouped by page. 2 OK CENTRE TRAY [PUNCH] key (See page 3-5.) This is used to punch holes in printed pages when an optional punch module is installed. NOTE When a functions is selected, it is highlighted. FINISHER AND SADDLE STITCH FINISHER Staple cartridge replacement and staple jam removal When a finisher is installed, a message will appear when the staple cartridge runs out of staples or a staple jam occurs. Follow the procedure below to replace the staple cartridge or remove jammed staples. ■ Replacing the cartridge in the finisher 1 Open the front cover of the finisher. the seal that holds the staples straight 5 Pull out. 3 the blue lever in the stapler and 2 Lower slide out the staple cartridge. the cartridge all the way in until it 6 Insert clicks into place. Insert the cartridge all the way in until it clicks into place. the empty staple case straight up and 3 Pull out of the cartridge. 4 Insert a new staple case into the cartridge. Push the staple case all the way in until it clicks into place. 7 Close the front cover of the finisher. NOTE Make a test print or copy in the staple sort mode to verify that stapling is performed properly. Do not remove the seal holding the staples until the staple case is set in the cartridge. 3-7 FINISHER AND SADDLE STITCH FINISHER ■ Replacing the cartridge in the saddle stitch finisher Only when the saddle stitch finisher (AR-F16) is installed. the lower cover of the saddle stitch 1 Open finisher. When an optional inserter is installed, open the front cover of the inserter before opening the lower cover of the finisher. out the saddle stitch unit carefully 2 Slide toward the front. the saddle stitch holder and the 5 Return saddle stitch unit to their respective original positions. sure that the finisher is firmly 6 Make attached to the machine and that A3, A4R, or B4 (11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 11"R, or 8-1/2" x 14") size paper is loaded. If one of the above paper sizes is not set, test stapling cannot be performed. 7 Close the lower cover of the finisher. Grasp the grip of the saddle staple 3 (1) holder and pull it out. (2) While still grasping the grip, rotate the saddle staple holder 90° in the direction of the arrow (rotate to the right). (2) Test stapling is automatically performed on a blank sheet. This operation is carried out to avoid blank stapling. (1) NOTE If test stapling fails to take place, repeat steps 1 to 7. the empty staple case and set a 4 Remove new one. Replace both staple cases with new ones. Remove the cover from the staple cartridge and then install the cartridge. 3-8 FINISHER AND SADDLE STITCH FINISHER ■ Removing a staple jam in the finisher steps 1 to 2 of the procedure for 1 Perform "Replacing the cartridge in the finisher" the knob, return part (A) to its 4 Holding original position. on page 3-7. 2 Holding the knob, lower part (A). Stapling area (A) (A) NOTE Do not touch the stapling area. The stapler could injure you. the 5 Return position. staple case to its original Insert the cartridge all the way in until it clicks into place. 3 Remove any jammed staples. 6 Close the front cover of the finisher. 3-9 3 FINISHER AND SADDLE STITCH FINISHER ■ Removing a staple jam in the saddle stitch finisher steps 1 to 3 of the procedure for 1 Perform "Replacing the cartridge in the saddle the 5 Return position. staple case to its original stitch finisher" on page 3-8. 2 Remove the empty staple case. the saddle stitch holder and the 6 Return saddle stitch unit to their respective original positions. While pushing down on lever (A), pull up 3 knob (B) . sure that the finisher is firmly 7 Make attached to the machine and that A3, A4R, or B4 (11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 11"R, or 8-1/2" x 14") size paper is loaded. (A) If one of the above paper sizes is not set, test stapling cannot be performed. (B) 8 Close the lower cover of the finisher. 4 Remove any jammed staples, and then return knob (B) to its original position. (B) Be sure to remove any strips of staples. Test stapling is automatically performed on a blank sheet. This operation is carried out to avoid blank stapling. NOTE If test stapling fails to take place, repeat steps 1 to 7. Jammed staples NOTE Do not touch the stapling area. The stapler could injure you. ■ Disposal of hole punch scrap (when the punch module is installed) 1 Open the cover of the hole punch module. the black handle, slide out the 2 Holding case containing the paper bits, and dispose of them properly. the 3 Return position. waste case to its original 4 Close the cover of the hole punch module. 3-10 FINISHER AND SADDLE STITCH FINISHER Removing a misfeed When a misfeed occurs, remove the misfed paper as explained below. ■ General procedure for the finisher and saddle stitch finisher move the finisher/saddle stitch 1 Gently finisher away from the machine while pressing the button. When an inserter is installed, separate the inserter from the machine while pressing on the inserter button. the misfed paper from the main 2 Remove unit. any misfed paper from the paper 6 Remove exit area. Be careful not to tear the misfed paper during removal. the upper cover 7 Close saddle stitch finisher. of the finisher/ 3 After removing the misfed paper, perform steps 1 and 3 on page 224 to reset the machine. ■ When a saddle stitch finisher is installed 3 Open the upper cover of the finisher/ saddle stitch finisher. (A) the front cover of the inserter (only 8 Open when an inserter is installed). When an inserter is installed, lift the tray of the inserter. Lift knob (A) (See the step 3 figure), then 4 remove any misfed paper. Be careful not to tear the misfed paper during removal. the lower cover of the saddle stitch 9 Open finisher. (B) Lift knob (B) (see the illustration in step 4) 5 and remove any misfed paper. Be careful not to tear the misfed paper during removal. the entrance cover of the saddle 10 Open stitch unit. 3-11 FINISHER AND SADDLE STITCH FINISHER 11 Remove the misfed paper. the lower cover of the saddle stitch 17 Close finisher. Be careful not to tear the misfed paper during removal. the entrance cover of the saddle 12 Close stitch unit. the front cover of the inserter (only 18 Close when an inserter is installed). the right-hand knob counter 13 Turn clockwise. Then, push the left-hand knob ■ When a punch module is installed 1 2 and turn it clockwise. any paper misfed on the exit side 14 Remove of the saddle stitch unit. Be careful not to tear the misfed paper during removal. the exit cover of the saddle stitch 15 Open unit and remove any misfed paper. Be careful not to tear the misfed paper during removal. the exit cover of the saddle stitch 16 Close unit. 3-12 19 Open the cover of the hole punch module. the green knob until the arrow is 20 Rotate within the range (A) on the label, and remove the misfed paper. (A) Be careful not to tear the misfed paper during removal. 21 Close the cover of the hole punch module. the finisher back against the main 22 Push unit. FINISHER AND SADDLE STITCH FINISHER Troubleshooting finisher/saddle stitch finisher problems Check the list below before calling for service. Problem Stapling position is not correct (including saddle stitch). The finisher/saddle stitch finisher does not operate. Check Solution or cause Check the stapling position setting. (See page 3-4.) Stapling position not set properly? Are any finisher/saddle stitch finisher Close all covers. (See step 7 on page 3-7 and covers open? step 7 on page 3-11.) Message indicating need to remove paper from the stapler compiler displayed? Remove all remaining paper from the stapler compiler. (For the stapler compiler, see "Part names" on page 3-2.) Message to displayed? Remove jammed staples. (See pages 3-9 and 3-10.) check the staple unit Message to add staples displayed? Replace the staple cartridge. (See pages 3-7 and 3-8.) Check that a staple cartridge has been installed. (See pages 3-7 and 3-8.) Different sizes of paper mixed together? Stapling cannot be performed on mixed paper sizes. The paper is badly curled. The quality and type of some papers may cause bad curling that prevents stapling. Take the paper out of the tray or bypass tray, turn the stack over, and reload it. Saddle stitch cannot be selected. The paper type of the selected paper tray is set to heavy paper. Saddle stitch is not possible on heavy paper. However, when cover insertion is selected, saddle stitch is possible on a single sheet of heavy paper inserted for use as a cover. The punch hole positions are not correct.* The punch function is not set to the correct punch positions. Check the allowed hole punch positions. (See page 3-5.) Message to check the punch module displayed? Dispose of punch scraps. (See page 3-10.) Mixed paper sizes. Punching is not possible when different paper sizes are mixed together. The paper is badly curled. The quality and type of some papers may cause bad curling that prevents punching. Take the paper out of the tray or bypass tray, turn the stack over, and reload it. Stapling cannot be performed (including saddle stitch). Cannot be punched.* * When a hole punch module is installed 3-13 3 INSERTER The inserter enables blank sheets or printed sheets to be added to copy and print output as covers or inserts without printing. The inserter also allows feeding of heavy paper that cannot be fed from the other trays. Printed output can also be fed one set at a time from the inserter for stapling or punching without performing stapling or staple sorting finishing (see "Manual operation of the inserter" (page 3-15)). When feeding from the inserter for pamphlet copying (page 5-6), cover or insert copying (page 5-12), or transparency insert copying (page 5-23), select "INSERTER" in step 4 of "Setting the paper type and paper size" (page 2-14), and be sure to perform steps 5 through 8. In step 9, make sure that the checkboxes below "PRINT", "COPY", and "DOC. FILING" are selected. If any of these checkboxes are not selected, touch them so that a checkmark appears. When feeding from the inserter for pamphlet copying (page 5-6), cover or insert copying (page 5-12), or transparency insert copying (page 5-23), select the inserter in the tray settings. The inserter attributes can also be selected in the system settings (see page 2-18). Part names 1 Paper tray Place blank or printed paper here to be inserted. 2 Paper guide When loading paper, adjust this guide to the width of the paper. 3 Top cover Open for misfeed removal. 4 Inserter operation panel Stapling and punching can be performed directly from the inserter operation panel without using the machine operation panel. 5 Paper guide lever Release the paper guide lock to remove misfed paper. 6 Front cover Open this cover to remove misfed paper from the finisher or saddle stitch finisher. NOTE To install the inserter... An optional finisher or saddle stitch finisher must be installed (page 3-2). Specifications Name Paper weight Paper types Paper size Paper capacity Paper conveying Power supply Dimensions Weight Inserter (AR-CF2) 60 to 256 g/m2 (16 lbs. to 68* lbs.) *For index paper, equivalent to 140-lbs. Plain paper, special paper (transparency film, coloured paper, paper with punch holes, tabbed paper, etc.) (Consult your retailer for more information on special papers that can be used.) A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5R, 11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 14", 8-1/2" x 13", 8-1/2" x 11", 8-1/2" x 11"R, 7-1/4" x 10-1/2"R, 5-1/2" x 8-1/2"R Max. 100 (80 g/m2 (20 lbs.)) Centre reference Supplied from machine When paper tray is folded up: 285 (565*) mm (W) x 585 mm (D) x 1120 mm (H) (11-15/64" (22-1/4"*) (W) x 23-3/64" (D) x 44-7/64" (H)) Not including stopper (40 mm (1-37/64")) when attached to machine * Including paper tray Approx. 24 kg (Approx. 53 lbs.) Specifications are subject to change for improvement without notice. 3-14 INSERTER Loading paper When loading paper in the inserter, load the paper face up. If the paper has a top edge and bottom edge, load in the same top-bottom orientation as the original. Adjust the paper guide on the paper tray to the width of the paper. When using tabbed paper, place the paper as follows: Load the paper back side up. The top side is inserted first. Back side The relation of copies and tabbed sheets is shown below. Copy Load tabbed paper Back side Back side Inserted first. 1st sheet 1st sheet Back side 2nd sheet 3rd sheet 4th sheet 5th sheet 4th sheet 5th sheet Back side Tabbed paper 4th sheet (back side) Copy result Tabbed paper 1st sheet (back side) Manual operation of the inserter The inserter can be used for stapling or punching without performing a copy operation. These functions are selected at the operation panel of the inserter. 1 2 [PUNCH] key When a punch module is installed on the finisher or saddle stitch finisher, punch holes can be added to blank paper or printed paper. The indicator lights when this function is selected. [STAPLE] key/indicator When this function is selected, each set of output is stapled and delivered to the finisher or saddle stitch finisher tray. (Note that the sets are not offset.) Press this key until the icon light of the desired staple position lights up. (" " pamphlet stapling can only be selected when a saddle stitch finisher is installed) 3 [START] key/indicator After selecting punch or staple settings with key 1 or key 2 , place the paper to be punched or stapled on the inserter tray and press this key. NOTES ● Do not use tabbed paper when operating the inserter manually. ● The punching and stapling functions cannot be used when the finisher or saddle stitch finisher has failed, or when the functions are prohibited* in the administrator settings (page 11 of the administrator settings guide). * Disabling of stapler/Disabling of punch/Disabling of finisher/Disabling of inserter 3-15 3 INSERTER ■ Alarm display If the [START] key indicator on the inserter operation panel is blinking and the [PUNCH] key or [STAPLE] key indicator is also blinking or solidly lit, operation will not start when the [START] key is pressed. Resolve the problem as indicated below, depending how the indicators are lit or blinking. [PUNCH] indicator [START] indicator [STAPLE] indicator Any one of the indicators is solidly lit. - Blinking - - - - - - - Solidly lit - - Any one of the indicators is blinking. - - - Blinks red - Blinking Blinks red Blinks red Blinks red Blinks red Cause Solution A paper size that cannot be fed has been loaded. Use paper that is a suitable size for punching, stapling, or saddle stitching (page 3-3). The paper type of the inserter is set to heavy paper. Heavy paper cannot be used. The finisher or saddle stitch finisher tray is full. Remove the paper from the tray. Discard the hole punch The hole punch scrap scrap (page 3-10). container in the punch module on the finisher or saddle stitch finisher is full. The finisher or saddle stitch finisher tray is full. Remove the paper from the tray. The finisher or saddle stitch finisher is out of staples. Replace the staple cartridge (page 3-7). The saddle stitch tray on the saddle stitch finisher is full. Remove the paper from the saddle stitch tray. The saddle stitch finisher is Replace the saddle stitch out of saddle stitch staples. staple cartridge (page 38). ■ Using the inserter For paper sizes that can be stapled or punched, see the finisher and saddle stitch finisher specifications on page 3-2. Some paper types cannot be stapled or punched (see "NOTES" on page 3-3). Do not use these paper types. 1 Load paper in the inserter. Paper guide Load the paper face up. When performing pamphlet stapling, place the paper so that the opened pages are face up as shown. Adjust the paper guide to the size of the paper. 2 Press the desired mode key. Press key 2 on page 3-15 for stapling or pamphlet stapling. Press key 1 on page 3-15 for punching. The selected mode lights up. 3-16 NOTE Pamphlet stapling can only be used when the saddle stitch finisher (AR-F16) is installed. When using pamphlet stapling, stapling and punching cannot be used in combination. 3 Press the [START] key. Make sure that the [START] key light is illuminated green and then press the [START] key. INSERTER Misfeed removal When a misfeed occurs in the inserter, remove the misfed paper following the procedure below. ■ Misfeed in the inserter move the inserter away from the 1 Gently machine while pressing the button. 6 Remove the misfed paper. the misfed paper from the main 2 Remove unit. a misfeed was not found in step 6, 7 Ifremove the misfed paper from under the Be careful not to tear the misfed paper during removal. After removing the misfed paper, perform steps 1 and 3 on page 224 to reset the machine. paper is not found in step 2, open 3 Ifthemisfed top cover. 4 Remove the misfed paper. Be careful not to tear the misfed paper during removal. Be careful not to tear the misfed paper during removal. paper guide. Be careful not to tear the misfed paper during removal. the paper guide lever to its original 8 Return position. the finisher to close the gap between 9 Push the machine and the inserter. After attaching the inserter on the machine, make sure that the paper misfeed message has been cleared and the normal message display appears. was not found in step 4, raise 5 Ifthea misfeed paper guide lever. 3-17 3 INSERTER Troubleshooting inserter problems Check the list below before calling for service. Problem Check Solution or cause The desired staple mode is not selected. Select the desired staple mode at the operation panel of the inserter (page 3-15). The paper is not loaded in the correct position. Load the paper correctly (page 3-16). The paper is not loaded face up. Paper must be loaded face up in the inserter tray (page 3-16). Are any inserter covers open? Close all covers. "Disabling of inserter" is enabled in the administrator settings. Check the administrator settings and disable "Disabling of inserter". A paper misfeed message appears. Remove the misfed paper (page 3-17). The [START] key light is not illuminated. Make sure that the punch or staple key has been selected on the operation panel of the inserter (page 3-15). The paper is curled or damp. Do not use curled or folded paper. When the inserter is not going to be used for a long time, remove the paper from the inserter, place it in a bag so that it does not absorb moisture, and store it in a cool and dark place. A paper misfeed occurs when paper is fed from the inserter. Do the size and orientation of the loaded paper match the paper size and orientation set in "Setting the paper type and paper size"? Make sure paper size and orientation set in "Setting the paper type and paper size" match the size and orientation of the loaded paper. A message appears each time paper is placed in the paper tray of the inserter. Was the [SIZE SELECT] key touched and the size and orientation of the paper for the inserter set as explained in "Setting the paper type and paper size"? To ensure that the correct paper (size and orientation) is loaded in the inserter, the machine indicates the current paper size setting each time paper is placed in the paper tray. Stapling position is not correct (including saddle stitch). The inserter does not operate. Paper occurs 3-18 misfeed SHARP OSA Sharp OSA (Open Systems Architecture) is an architecture that enables external applications to be directly connected to a digital multifunction machine over a network. When a digital multifunction machine that supports Sharp OSA is used, the operation panel controls and functions of the machine such as scan send can be linked to an external application. There are two types of external applications: "standard application" and "external account application". An "external account application" is used for centralized account management of a multifunction machine on a network. A "standard application" refers to all other applications. APPLICATION COMMUNICATION MODULE (MX-AMX2) The application communication module is required to use a "standard application" on the machine. When a previously registered standard application is selected in the Web pages of the machine, the machine retrieves the operation screen from the registered URL. Control of the operation screen is performed by the standard application, and Scan to FTP can be executed. Standard application setup To register a standard application in the machine's Web pages, click [External Applications] in the administrator menu frame and then click [Standard Applications]. Configure settings for the standard application in the screen that appears. Selecting a standard application There are two methods for selecting a standard application that has been registered in the machine's Web pages. ■ Selecting a standard application from the job status screen The Sharp OSA icon will appear in the lower left-hand corner of the job status screen. Follow the steps below to select a standard application. 1 Touch the Sharp OSA icon. If no standard applications have been stored in the Web pages, the key cannot be touched. 2 Select the standard application. If two or more standard applications have been 02 stored in the Web pages, 03 the screen to select the standard application will 04 appear. Touch the standard application that you wish to use. If only one standard application has been stored in the Web pages, connection to the standard application will begin. App 01 App App App machine 3 The application. connects to the standard The message "Connecting to the external application." appears while the machine communicates with the standard application. 3-19 3 APPLICATION COMMUNICATION MODULE (MX-AMX2) ■ Selecting the standard application from document filing mode The [Sharp OSA] key appears in the upper right-hand corner of the document filing screen. Follow the steps below to select a standard application. 1 Touch the [Sharp OSA] key. Sharp OSA FILE RETRIEVE FILE FOLDER If no standard applications have been stored in the Web pages, the key cannot be touched. QUICK FILE FOLDER 2 Select the standard application. If one or more standard applications have been 02 stored in the Web pages, 03 the screen to select the standard application will 04 appear. Touch the standard application that you wish to use. If only one standard application has been stored in the Web pages, connection to the standard application will begin. App 01 App App App machine 3 The application. connects to the standard The message "Connecting to the external application." appears while the machine communicates with the standard application. Operation in OSA mode When the application communication module is installed, it is possible to check the job log of OSA scan mode in the job status screen. The procedure for displaying the job log is the same as for regular Scan to FTP. To display the job log of OSA scan mode, touch the [SCAN] key once again while the job log of scan mode appears in the job status screen. (When this is done, the name of the key will change to [OSA SCAN].) To return to the scan screen from the OSA scan screen, touch the [OSA SCAN] key. 3-20 EXTERNAL ACCOUNT MODULE (MX-AMX3) The external account module is required to use a "external account application" on the machine. An external account application can be used in "external authentication mode" or "external count mode". When external authentication mode is used, the login screen is retrieved from the application when the machine is started. When a job ends, a job notification screen is sent to the application to enable counts to be kept for each authenticated user. When "external count mode" is used, the login screen is not displayed when the machine is started. Only a job result notification is sent to the application. User authentication by the external account application cannot be used, however, the external account application can be used in combination with the internal account function. External account application setup To register an external account application in the machine's Web pages, click [External Applications] in the administrator menu frame and then click [External Accounting]. Configure settings for the external account application in the screen that appears. To make the settings in the Web page take effect, restart the machine. Operation in external account mode 3 The two modes for using an external account application operate as explained below. ■ External authentication mode When the [ENABLE AUTHENTICATION BY EXTERNAL SERVER] checkbox is selected in "External account setting" of "Sharp OSA settings" in the administrator settings, the machine enters external authentication mode. When the machine is powered on in external authentication mode, the machine accesses the external account application and displays the login screen. The login screen also appears when the [CALL] key is touched to run a job in the job status complete screen. (The login screen does not appear if the user has already logged in by the normal method.) The [JOB STATUS] key can be pressed while the login screen appears to show the job status screen. To return to the previous state, press the mode select key. NOTES ● The user control function of the machine cannot be used in external authentication mode. ● The [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key can be pressed while the login screen appears to show the system settings screen. To return to the initial state, touch the [EXIT] key. If login fails If the login screen fails to appear or the application does not operate correctly, the machine may also stop operating correctly. In this event, it is recommended that you quit external account mode from the Web pages of the machine. For more information, see [Help] in the Web pages. If it is necessary to forcibly terminate external account mode using the operation panel of the machine, follow the steps below. Press the [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key and change "External account setting" in the administrator settings (see page 14 of the administrator settings guide). After changing the setting, restart the machine. ■ External count mode When only the [ENABLE EXTERNAL ACCOUNT CONTROL] setting is enabled in "External account setting" of "Sharp OSA settings" in the administrator settings, the machine enters external count mode. Unlike external authentication mode, when the machine is started in "external count mode", the login screen of the external account application is not displayed. Only the job result is sent to the external account application. External count mode can be used together with the user control function of the machine. (External count mode can also be used when the user control function is disabled.) 3-21 Part 2: Copier Operation CHAPTER 4 MAKING COPIES This chapter explains the basic procedures for making copies, including selection of the copy ratio and other copy settings. Page AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER ...................................................... 4-2 ● Acceptable originals ........................................................................ 4-2 PLACING ORIGINALS............................................................................ 4-3 CHECKING THE SIZE OF A PLACED ORIGINAL ................................. 4-5 ● Manually setting the scanning size ................................................. 4-5 STORING, DELETING, AND USING ORIGINAL SIZES ........................ 4-6 ● Storing or deleting an original size .................................................. 4-6 NORMAL COPYING ............................................................................... 4-7 ● Making copies with the automatic document feeding function ........ 4-7 ● Automatic two-sided copying using the automatic document feeding function............................................................................................ 4-10 ● Copying from the document glass................................................... 4-11 ● Automatic two-sided copying from the document glass .................. 4-13 ADJUSTING THE EXPOSURE .....................................................................4-14 REDUCTION/ENLARGEMENT/ZOOM................................................... 4-15 ● Automatic selection (auto image) .................................................... 4-15 ● Manual selection (preset copy ratios/zoom).................................... 4-16 ● XY ZOOM........................................................................................ 4-18 SPECIAL PAPERS.................................................................................. 4-20 4-1 AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER The automatic document feeding function automatically feeds originals into the machine, making continuous copying possible. In addition, both sides of two-sided sheet originals can be simultaneously scanned. This function is convenient when you have a large number of original pages to scan. Acceptable originals Up to 150 originals (80 g/m2 (20 lbs.)) of the same size, or an overall stack height of no more than 19.5 mm (49/64"), can be loaded. Originals of mixed length can also be loaded together as long as they are the same width; however, some special functions may not operate correctly. ■ Size and weight of acceptable originals ■ Total number of originals that can be set in the document feeder tray ● Original size: A5 or 5-1/2" x 8-1/2" (148 x 210 mm) Maximum of 150 sheets (80 g/m2 (20 lbs.)) or total stack height of 19.5 mm (49/64") or less. A3 or 11" x 17" (297 x 420 mm) Weight (thickness): 50g/m2 or 14 lbs. 128 g/m2 or 42 lbs. Special heavy papers (176 g/m2 (65 lbs.), 205 g/m2 (110 lbs.)) can be used. g/m 2 ... Weight of a sheet of paper of 1 m 2 ■ Notes on use of the automatic document feeder ●Use originals within the specified size and weight ranges. Use of originals out of the specified range may cause an original misfeed. ●Before loading originals into the document feeder tray, be sure to remove any staples or paper clips. ●If originals have damp spots from correction fluid, ink or glue from pasteups, be sure they are dried before they are fed. If not, the interior of the document feeder or the document glass may be soiled. ●Do not use the following originals. These originals may cause incorrect original size detection, original misfeeds, and smudges on copies. ● Transparency film, tracing paper, carbon paper, thermal paper or originals printed with thermal transfer ink ribbon should not be fed through the document feeder. Originals to be fed through the feeder should not be damaged, crumpled or folded or have loosely pasted paper on them or cutouts in them. Originals with multiple punched holes other than two-hole or three-hole punched paper may not feed correctly. ●When using originals with two or three holes, place them so that the Hole positions punched edge is at a position other than the feed slot. Hole positions Hole positions 4-2 PLACING ORIGINALS ■ Using the feeder automatic document ■ Using the document glass the document cover, make sure that 1 Open an original has not been left on the Open the document cover, place the original face down on the document glass, and then gently close the document cover. document glass, and then gently close the document cover. NOTES ● After placing the original, be sure to close the document cover. If left open, parts outside of the original will be copied black, causing excessive use of toner. ● Do not place any objects under the original size detector, because they may damage it or the original size may not be detected properly. the original guides to the size of the 2 Adjust originals. the originals 3 Place document feeder tray. face up in the Document glass scale mark Document glass scale mark Place the originals face up. Insert the originals all the way into the document feeder. The stack height must not be higher than the indicator line (maximum of 150 pages). B5 A4 or 8½x11 B4 or 8½x14 A3 or 11x17 A4 B5 or 8½x11 ●Align the corner of the original with the tip of the arrow mark on the document glass scale. ●Place the original in the appropriate position for its size as shown above. NOTE Original size detection function One of the four groups of standard original sizes shown below can be selected for detection by the original size detection function. The factory default setting is "AB-2". The setting can be changed using "ORIGINAL SIZE DETECTOR SETTING" in the administrator settings. Detectable original sizes Group Document feeder tray (for reversing automatic document feeding) Document glass 1 AB-1 A3, A4, A4R, A5,B4, B5, B5R Document glass + 8-1/2" x 11", 216x330 2 AB-2 A3, A4, A4R, A5,B5, B5R, 216x330 Document glass + 8-1/2" x 11", B4 3 INCH-1 11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 14", 8-1/2" x 11", 8-1/2" x 11"R, 5-1/2" x 8-1/2" Document glass + A4 4 INCH-2 11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 13", 8-1/2" x 11", 8-1/2" x 11"R, 5-1/2" x 8-1/2" Document glass + A4 4-3 4 PLACING ORIGINALS ■ Standard original placement orientations [Example 1] Document feeder tray Document glass [Example 2] Document feeder tray Document glass Place originals in the document feeder tray or on the document glass so that the top and bottom of the original is positioned as shown in the illustration. If not, staples will be incorrectly positioned and some special features may not give the expected result. ■ Automatic copy image rotation - rotation copying If the orientation of the originals and copy paper are different, the original image will be automatically rotated 90° and copied. (When an image is rotated, a message will be displayed.) If a function is selected that is not suitable for rotation, such as enlarging the copy to greater than A4 (8-1/2" x 11") size or staple sorting with the saddle stitch finisher, rotation will not be possible. [Example] Orientation of original Orientation of paper Copy after rotation Face down Face down ●This function operates in both the auto paper select or auto image mode. ("Rotation copy setting" can be disabled in the administrator settings. See page 16 of the administrator settings guide.) 4-4 CHECKING THE SIZE OF A PLACED ORIGINAL If the placed original is a standard size, the size will be automatically detected (automatic original detection function) and displayed in the touch panel. Make sure that the correct size has been detected. (A) : The original size is displayed. (B) : [AUTO] appears when the automatic original detection function is operating. If you have loaded a non-standard size original or wish to change the scanning size, you can follow the steps below to manually set the original scanning size. (For the standard sizes, see "Original size detection function" on page 4-3.) 0 A4 AUTO ORIGINAL AUTO EXPOSURE (A) (B) NOTE If a non-standard size original is loaded (including special sizes), the closest standard size may be displayed, or the original size may not appear at all. If "CANCEL DETECTION AT DOCUMENT GLASS" is enabled in the administrator settings (see page 11 of the administrator settings guide), automatic original detection at the document glass will not operate. In this case, follow the steps below to manually set the original scanning size. Manually setting the scanning size If you load an original that is not a standard size (such as an INCH size), or if the size is not detected correctly, you must touch the [ORIGINAL] key and set the original size manually. Perform the following steps after placing the document in the automatic document feeder or on the document glass. 1 If a non-standard size original is placed in the document feeder or on the document glass, touch the [SIZE INPUT] tab and then enter the X (width) and Y (length) dimensions of the original. Touch the [ORIGINAL] key. 0 AUTO ORIGINAL X is initially selected. Enter the X dimension 432) (width) and then touch X 420 (64 mm the Y( ) key and enter (64 297) Y 297 mm the Y dimension (length). STANDARD SIZE SIZE INPUT X can be from 64 to 432 mm, and Y can be from 64 to 297 mm. If you frequently use originals that are the same non-standard size, you can store the size as explained in "STORING, DELETING, AND USING ORIGINAL SIZES"on the following page. This will save you the trouble of manually entering the size each time you use that original size. X OK Y AUTO EXPOSURE 2 Touch the desired original size key. A5 A4 OK A5R A4R AB B5 B4 INCH B5R A3 STANDARD SIZE [AUTO] is no longer highlighted. [MANUAL] and the original size key you touched are highlighted. SIZE INPUT If you wish to select an INCH size, touch the [AB/INCH] key and then touch the desired original size key. 1/ 2 OK 51/2X81/2 8 X13 51/2X81/2R 81/2 X14 AB 81/2X11 11X17 INCH 81/2X11R STANDARD SIZE SIZE INPUT [INCH] is highlighted and INCH size keys are displayed. To return to the AB palette, touch the [AB/INCH] key once again. 3 Touch the [OK] key. You will return to the initial screen. selected original size appears in the 4 The top half of the [ORIGINAL] key. 0 81/2 X11 ORIGINAL AUTO EXPOSURE 4-5 4 STORING, DELETING, AND USING ORIGINAL SIZES Up to 9 special original sizes can be stored. Stored sizes can be easily called up and are not erased if the power is turned off. Storing a frequently used original size saves you the trouble of manually setting the size each time you copy that size of document. ● To cancel an original size storing, using, or deleting operation, touch the [ORIGINAL] key on the screen. Storing or deleting an original size 1 Touch the [ORIGINAL] key. the X (width) and Y (length) 5 Enter dimensions of the original with the 0 keys. AUTO ORIGINAL X CANCEL A AUTO EXPOSURE X 420 (64 432) mm Y 297 (64 297) mm RECALL 2 STORE/DELETE Touch the [CUSTOM SIZE] key. X (width) selected. is initially Enter X and then touch the ( ) key to enter Y. A width of 64 to 432 mm can be entered in X, and a length of 64 to 297 mm can be entered in Y. AB AUTO INCH MANUAL AUTO EXPOSURE the [OK] key. 6 Touch The original size entered in step 5 is stored in the AUTO A4 PAPER SELE CUSTOM SIZE key selected in step 4. 100% E INPUT COPY RATI To exit, touch the [ORIGINAL] key. you touch a key that shows an 7 When original size in step 4, a message screen 3 Touch the [STORE/DELETE] key. appears that contains the keys [CANCEL], [DELETE], and [STORE]. ●To cancel the procedure, touch the [CANCEL] key. ●To delete the selected original size, touch the [DELETE] key. ●To change the original size stored in the key, touch the [STORE] key. The screen of step 5 will appear to let you change the size. AUTO MANUA CUSTO SIZE LL STORE/DELETE the original size key ( 4 Touch you wish to store or delete. X68 OK Y To store an original size, touch a key that does not show a size ( ). Y78 RECALL ) that STORE/DELETE Keys that already have an original size stored will show the stored size ( X68 Y78 ). To delete or change a stored size, touch the key that shows the size that you wish to delete or change. ●If you are storing an original size, go to step 5. ●To delete or change an original size, go to step 7. 8 To exit, touch the [ORIGINAL] key. ■ USING A STORED ORIGINAL SIZE steps 1 to 2 of "STORING 1 Follow DELETING AN ORIGINAL SIZE". the original size key that you wish 2 Touch to use. X68 Y78 RECALL STORE/DELETE the [OK] key. 3 Touch The stored original size is called up. 4-6 OR NORMAL COPYING This section describes the normal copying procedure. Making copies with the automatic document feeding function ■ 1-sided copies of 1-sided originals Original Copy the originals in the document feeder 1 Place tray. (pages 4-3 to 4-6) 5 Touch the [OK] key. 0 OK 4 that the 1-sided to 1-sided copy 2 Ensure mode is selected. The one-sided to onesided mode is selected 12 123 3 when no icon for a twoA4 sided mode appears in 1. 2. 5. A4 the dashed area on the A4 B5 3. B4 B4 4. A3 display. If the 1-sided to 1-sided copy mode is already selected, steps 3 to 5 are not needed. ORIGINAL that paper of the same size as the 6 Ensure originals is automatically selected*. AUTO EXPOSURE A4 3 Touch the [2-SIDED COPY] key. AUTO A4 PAPER SELECT 100% O The selected tray will be highlighted or the message "LOAD xxxxxx PAPER." will appear. If the message appears, load paper in a paper tray with paper of the required size. Even if the message above appears, copying can be performed onto the currently selected paper. *The following requirements must be satisfied. Originals of a standard size (A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R or A5 (11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 14", 8-1/2" x 11", 81/2" x 11"R or 5-1/2" x 8-1/2R")) are set and the auto paper select function is enabled. SPECIAL MODES 2-SIDED COPY If originals of a size other than the sizes above are 1. A4 2. B5 A4 to be copied, manually PLAIN PLAIN PLAIN select the desired paper 5. A4 PLAIN 3. B4 size by touching the PLAIN 4. A3 PLAIN [PAPER SELECT] key and then touching the desired paper size selection key. READY TO SCAN FOR COPY. OUTPUT 4 Touch the [1-sided to 1-sided copy] key. Touch the [1-sided to 1sided copy] key. The selected key will be highlighted and the paper selection screen will close. To close the paper selection screen without making a selection, touch the [PAPER SELECT] key. 4-7 NORMAL COPYING 7 Select the desired output mode (page 4-9). The sort mode is the default mode. To select the group OUTPUT mode, touch the [OUTPUT] key, then touch the [GROUP] key FILE on the output setting screen, and then touch the [OK] key on the setting screen. 2-SIDED COPY the numeric keys to set the desired 8 Use number of copies. Up to 999 can be set. If you are only making a single copy, the copy can be made with the copy number display showing "0". Use the [C] (clear) LOGOUT key to cancel an entry if a mistake has been made. 4-8 9 Press the [START] key. If the [C] key is pressed while originals are being scanned, scanning will stop. If copying had already started, copying and scanning will stop after the original in progress is output to the original exit area. In these cases the copy quantity will be reset to "0". NOTES ● The 1-sided to 1-sided copying mode is set as the default in the initial settings. If the default setting has not been changed using the "Initial status settings" (administrator settings), steps 3 to 5 on page 4-7 can be omitted. To cancel copying... To cancel a copy job in progress, press the [CA] key. A confirmation message will appear. Touch the [YES] key to cancel copying. NORMAL COPYING ■ Copy output (sort and group) Example: Making five sets or five copies each of three originals ● Sorting copies into sets Original Five sets of copies OUTPUT SORT SPECIAL MODES 2-SIDED COPY OUTPUT GROUP LOGOUT Set the number of copies (5) Touch the [OUTPUT] key Touch the [SORT] key Press the [START] key When using the automatic document feeding function, sorting is automatically selected when the original is placed in the document feeder. ● Grouping copies by page 4 Original 5 copies per page OUTPUT SORT SPECIAL MODES 2-SIDED COPY OUTPUT GROUP LOGOUT Set the number of copies (5) Touch the [OUTPUT] key Touch the [GROUP] key Press the [START] key "Group" is automatically selected when the original is placed on the document glass. ■ Selecting the output tray (when an optional finisher or saddle stitch finisher is installed) When the [FINISHER TRAY] key is highlighted, output pages are delivered to the finisher tray of the finisher or saddle stitch finisher. When the "CENTRE TRAY" key is highlighted, output pages are delivered to the centre tray. Touch the appropriate key to select the desired output tray. 0 OUTPUT SORT FINISHER TRAY STAPLE SORT GROUP OK CENTRE TRAY SADDLE STITCH PUNCH OFFSET This screen appears when a saddle stitch finisher is installed. The screen that appears when a finisher is installed is slightly different. 4-9 NORMAL COPYING Automatic two-sided copying document feeding function using the automatic The machine can automatically copy two-sided originals, saving you the trouble of manually turning over each original page. Original Copy 1. Automatic two-sided copying from one-sided originals 2. Automatic two-sided copying from two-sided originals 3. Automatic one-sided copying from two-sided originals the originals in the document feeder 1 Place tray. (pages 4-3 to 4-6) 3 Select the desired copy mode. The display will vary depending on the equipment installed. ED COPY 2 Touch the [2-SIDED COPY] key. SPECIAL MODES If a copy key is touched for a mode that cannot be selected, a double beep will sound. Example of a portrait-oriented original Example of a landscape-oriented original 2-SIDED COPY OUTPUT When making automatic two-sided copies of a one-sided A3 (11" x 17") or B4 (8-1/2" x 14") size portrait original, or when you wish to invert the top and bottom of the back side of a two-sided original, touch the [BINDING CHANGE] key. 4 Touch the [OK] key. 0 OK BINDING Perform steps 6 through 9 on pages 4-7 and 4-8. 4-10 NORMAL COPYING Copying from the document glass When copying originals which cannot be fed from the automatic document feeder such as thick originals, open the document cover and copy the originals from the document glass. ■ 1-sided copies of 1-sided originals Original Copy the original on the document glass. 1 Place (pages 4-3 to 4-6) that paper of the same size as the 3 Ensure original is automatically selected*. AUTO EXPOSURE AUTO A4 PAPER SELECT 100% COPY RATIO required size. Document glass scale mark B5 A4 or 8½x11 B4 or 8½x14 A3 or 11x17 Document glass scale mark A4 B5 or 8½x11 The selected tray will be highlighted or the message "LOAD xxxxxx PAPER." will appear. If the message appears, load paper in a paper tray with paper of the Even if the message above is displayed, copying can be performed onto the currently selected paper. * The following requirements must be satisfied. Originals of a standard size (A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R or A5 (11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 14", 8-1/2" x 11", 81/2" x 11"R or 5-1/2" x 8-1/2"R)) are set and the auto paper select function is enabled. ●Align the corner of the original with the tip of the arrow mark on the document glass scale. ●Place the original in the appropriate position for its size as shown above. If originals of a size other than the sizes above are 1. A4 2. B5 A4 to be copied, manually PLAIN PLAIN PLAIN select the desired paper 5. A4 PLAIN 3. B4 size by touching the PLAIN 4. A3 PLAIN [PAPER SELECT] key and then touching the desired paper size selection key. Ensure that the 1-sided to 1-sided copy mode is selected. The selected key will be highlighted and the paper selection screen will close. To close the paper selection screen without making a selection, touch the [PAPER SELECT] key. 2 The one-sided to onesided mode is selected 222 when no icon for a two111 A4 sided mode appears in 1. 2. the dashed area on the 5. A4 A4 B5 3. B4 B4 display. If an icon 4. A3 appears, perform steps 3 to 5 on page 4-7 and then go to step 3. ORIGINAL A4 READY TO SCAN FOR COPY. 4-11 4 NORMAL COPYING the desired output mode. (page 44 Select 9.) 2-SIDED COPY OUTPUT FILE Group mode default mode. is 6 Press the [START] key. Replace the original with the next original and press the [START] key. Repeat this operation until all originals have been scanned. the To select sort mode, touch the [OUTPUT] key, touch the [SORT] key in the screen that appears, and then touch the [OK] key. the numeric keys to set the desired 5 Use number of copies. Up to 999 can be set. If you are only making a single copy, the copy can be made with the copy number display showing "0". If you selected "Sort" for the output mode in step 4 and pressed the [START] key, it is necessary to touch the [READEND] key. 7 Touch the [READ-END] key. PLACE NEXT ORIGINAL. PRESS [START]. WHEN FINISHED, PRESS [READ-END]. READ-END LOGOUT Use the [C] (clear) key to cancel an entry if a mistake has been made. To cancel copying... To cancel a copy job in progress, press the [CA] key. A confirmation message will appear. Touch the [YES] key to cancel copying. 4-12 NORMAL COPYING Automatic two-sided copying from the document glass The following two-sided copying function is possible. The copy paper is turned over automatically, allowing easy twosided copying. Original Copy an original on the document glass. 1 Place (pages 4-3 to 4-6) 3 Touch the [1-sided to 2-sided copy] key. Example of a portrait-oriented original Document glass scale mark B5 A4 or 8½x11 B4 or 8½x14 A3 or 11x17 Document glass scale mark A4 B5 or 8½x11 ●Align the corner of the original with the tip of the arrow mark on the document glass scale. ●Place the original in the appropriate position for its size as shown above. 2 Touch the [2-SIDED COPY] key. SPECIAL MODES 2-SIDED COPY OUTPUT Example of a landscape-oriented original When making automatic two-sided copies of a one-sided A3 (11" x 17") or B4 (8-1/2" x 14") size portrait original, or when you wish to invert the top and bottom of the back side of a two-sided original, touch the [BINDING CHANGE] key. 4 Touch the [OK] key. 0 OK BINDING Perform steps 3 to 7 on pages 4-11 and 4-12. 4-13 4 ADJUSTING THE EXPOSURE Select an appropriate exposure mode for the original to be copied. The selections are AUTO, TEXT, TEXT/PHOTO and PHOTO. ■ Automatic exposure adjustment AUTO The default exposure ORIGINAL setting is "AUTO", which automatically adjusts the exposure for the original. To select the exposure mode, or to AUTO A4 manually adjust the PAPER SELECT exposure level, follow the steps below. AUTO EXPOSURE ■ Selecting the exposure mode and manually adjusting the exposure level 1 Touch the [EXPOSURE] key. 3 Adjust the exposure level. AUTO ORIGINAL AUTO EXPOSURE 1 MANUAL 3 5 Touch the key to make darker copies. Touch the key to make lighter copies. AUTO A4 PAPER SELECT 2 Select [TEXT], [TEXT/PHOTO] or [PHOTO] as appropriate for the original to be copied. 0 TEXT AUTO ORIGINAL OK ORIGINAL IMAGE TYPE AUTO MANUAL NOTE Exposure levels in TEXT mode 1 to 2: Dark originals such as newspaper 3: Normal density originals 4 to 5: Originals written with pencils or light colour characters EXPOSURE TEXT/PHOTO 1 3 5 AUTO A4 PAPER SELECT PHOTO To select [TEXT], touch the [AUTO key so that [MANUAL] is selected. 100% COPY RATIO MANUAL] Exposure modes selection TEXT: This mode is useful for producing dark text copies with minimum background. TEXT/PHOTO: This provides the best balance for copying an original which contains both text and photos. This mode is also useful for copying printed photographs. PHOTO: This mode provides the best copies of photographs with fine details. 4-14 About the steps that follow If an automatic document feeder is being used, see pages 4-7 through 4-10. If the document glass is being used, see pages 4-11 through 413. NOTES ● To return to the automatic exposure mode, touch the [AUTO / MANUAL] key to highlight [AUTO], and then touch the [OK] key. ● The exposure level used in automatic exposure mode can be adjusted in the administrator settings. See "Exposure adjustment" on page 16 of the administrator settings guide. REDUCTION/ENLARGEMENT/ZOOM Reduction and enlargement ratios can be selected automatically or manually. ● Automatic selection: Auto image (see below) ● Manual selection: Preset copy ratios/zoom (see page 4-16) Automatic selection (auto image) The reduction or enlargement ratio will be selected automatically based on the original size and the selected paper size. the original in the document feeder 1 Place tray or on the document glass. (pages 4-3 3 Touch the [AUTO IMAGE] key. 5. A4 to 4-6) The detected original size will be displayed. NOTE Automatic ratio adjustment can only be used for the following original and paper sizes. It cannot be used for other sizes. However, in the case of non-standard original and paper sizes, the sizes can be entered to make automatic ratio adjustment possible for those sizes. Original sizes:Standard sizes (see "Original size detection function" on page 4-3.) Paper size: A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, or A5R (11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 14", 8-1/2" x 11", 81/2" x 11"R, or 5-1/2" x 8-1/2"R) the [PAPER SELECT] key and then 2 Touch select the desired paper size. READY TO SCAN FOR COPY. 1. A4 PLAIN 2. B5 PLAIN 3. A4 HEAVY PAPER 4. A3 PLAIN A4 PLAIN The selected paper size key is highlighted and the paper selection screen closes. AUTO IMAGE The [AUTO IMAGE] key will be highlighted and the best reduction or 122% enlargement ratio for the COPY RATIO original size and the selected paper size will be selected and displayed in the copy ratio display. PAPER SELECT O GE NOTE If the message "ROTATE ORIGINAL FROM TO " is displayed, change the orientation of the original as indicated in the message. When the message above is displayed, copying can be done without changing the orientation, but the image will not fit the paper correctly. 5. A4 PLAIN NOTE If paper of the desired size is not loaded in any tray, load paper of the required size in a paper tray or the bypass tray. (See "Setting the paper type and paper size" on page 2-14.) the numeric keys to set the desired 4 Use number of copies. Up to 999 can be set. If you are only making a single copy, the copy can be made with the copy number display showing "0". LOGOUT Use the [C] (clear) key to cancel an entry if a mistake has been made. 5 Press the [START] key. If you placed the original on the document glass, set the output mode to "Sort", and pressed the [START] key, you must touch the [READ-END] key after all pages of the original have been scanned. (Step 7 on page 4-12) To cancel the auto image mode, touch the [CA] key. 4-15 4 REDUCTION/ENLARGEMENT/ZOOM Manual selection (preset copy ratios/zoom) Five preset enlargement and five preset reduction copy ratios (max. 400%, min. 25%) can be selected. In addition, the zoom keys can be used to select any ratio from 25% to 400% in increments of 1%. the original in the document feeder 1 Place tray or on the document glass. (pages 4-3 the reduction, enlargement, and 4 Use [ZOOM] keys on the touch panel to set the to 4-6) desired copy ratio. NOTE When the original is placed in the document feeder, the ratio can be set from 25% to 200%. ZOOM 2 Touch the [COPY RATIO] key. XY ZOOM AUTO A4 PAPER SELECT Zoom ratios: Any ratio from 25% to 400% can 70 ZOOM be set in 1% increments. Touch the [ ] key to increase the ratio, or the [ ] key to decrease MENU XY ZOOM the ratio. (If you continue to touch the [ ]/[ ] key, the ratio will change automatically. After 3 seconds, the ratio will change rapidly.) 100% COPY RATIO the [MENU] key to select menu " 3 Use menu " " for copy ratio selection. " or Menu READY TO SCAN FOR COPY. 0 OK ZOOM NOTES ● Touch a reduction or enlargement key to set the approximate ratio, then touch the [ ] key to increase the ratio or the [ ] key to decrease the ratio. ● Automatic changing of the ratio when a zoom key is continuously touched can be disabled in the administrator settings (see "Key operation setting (prohibit key repeat)" on page 10 of the administrator settings guide). ● If the message "IMAGE IS LARGER THAN COPY PAPER." appears when a ratio is selected, the image may not fit on the copy paper. ● To set the horizontal and vertical copy ratios separately, use the XY ZOOM feature. See page 4-18. AUTO ORIGINAL AUTO EXPOSURE AUTO A4 PAPER SELECT XY ZOOM MENU AUTO IMAGE COPY RATIO ●A.Preset reduction copy ratios are: 70%, 81% and 86% (for the AB system). 77% and 64% (for the inch system). ●B.Preset enlargement copy ratios are: 115%, 122% and 141% (for the AB system). 121% and 129% (for the inch system). Menu 0 OK ZOOM AUTO ORIGINAL AUTO EXPOSURE AUTO A4 PAPER SELECT XY ZOOM MENU AUTO IMAGE (The custom ratios set by the administrator appear in ratio menu 2.) 4-16 5 Touch the [OK] key. 0 OK COPY RATIO ●A.Preset reduction copy ratios are: 50% and 25%. ●B.Preset enlargement copy ratios are: 200% and 400%. MENU AUTO ORIGINAL AUTO EXPOSURE AUTO A4 PAPER SELECT IO AUTO IMAGE COPY RATIO REDUCTION/ENLARGEMENT/ZOOM sure that an appropriate paper size 6 Make has been selected based on the selected ratio. ORIGINAL A4 4 5. A4 AUTO EXPOSURE Auto paper select display B4 AUTO PAPER SELECT 86% COPY RATIO NOTE If the auto paper select display does not appear, a tray with the correct size of paper for the selected ratio will not be automatically selected. 8 Press the [START] key. If you placed the original on the document glass, set the output to "Sort", and pressed the [START] key, you must touch the [READ-END] key after all pages of the original have been scanned. (Step 7 on page 4-12) To return the ratio to 100% To return the ratio setting to 100%, touch the [COPY RATIO] key to display the ratio menu and then touch the [100%] key. (Steps 2 and 3 on page 4-16.) the numeric keys to set the desired 7 Use number of copies. Up to 999 can be set. If you are only making a single copy, the copy can be made with the copy number display showing "0". 4 LOGOUT Use the [C] (clear) key to cancel an entry if a mistake has been made. 4-17 REDUCTION/ENLARGEMENT/ZOOM XY ZOOM The XY ZOOM feature allows the horizontal and vertical copy ratios to be changed separately. The ratios can be set from 25% to 400% in increments of 1%. Example: Selecting 100% for the length and 50% for the width Copy Original the original in the document feeder 1 Place tray or on the document glass. (pages 4-3 to 4-6) NOTE When the original is placed in the document feeder, the ratio can be set from 25% to 200%. 2 Touch the [COPY RATIO] key. the 5 Use ZOOM ([ reduction, enlargement, and ], [ ]) keys to change the copy ratio in the horizontal (X) direction. Y 64% 10 ZOOM 50% XY ZOOM AUTO A4 PAPER SELECT 100% COPY RATIO A fixed ratio key will not become highlighted when touched. X 50 Y 100 Zoom ratios: Any ratio from 25% to 400% can be set in 1% increments. Touch the [ ] key to increase the ratio, or the [ ] key to decrease the ratio. (If you continue to touch the [ ]/[ ] key, the ratio will change automatically. After 3 seconds, the ratio will change rapidly.) ZOOM 3 Touch the [XY ZOOM] key. MENU XY ZOOM 4 Touch the [X] key. X 100 Y 100 ZOOM The initial state of the [X] key is selected (highlighted), so this step normally is not necessary. Touch the [X] key only if it is not highlighted yet. NOTES ● Touch a reduction or enlargement key to set the approximate ratio, then touch the [ ] key to increase the ratio or the [ ] key to decrease the ratio. ● Automatic changing of the ratio when a zoom key is continuously touched can be disabled in the administrator settings (see "Key operation setting (prohibit key repeat)" on page 10 of the administrator settings guide). 6 Touch the [Y] key. X 50 Y 100 ZOOM 4-18 REDUCTION/ENLARGEMENT/ZOOM the 7 Use ZOOM ([ reduction, enlargement, and ], [ ]) keys to change the copy ratio in the vertical (Y) direction. 70% X 50 70 Y 64% any desired copy settings such as 10 Select the exposure or number of copies, and then press the [START] key. A fixed ratio key will not become highlighted when touched. ZOOM 50% 50 70 Y The zoom keys can be used to change the ratio from 25% to 400% in increments of 1%. If needed, you can touch the [X] key once again to readjust the X zoom. ZOOM XY ZOOM CANCEL To cancel an X or Y zoom setting... Touch the [XY ZOOM] key or the [CANCEL] key in the ratio selection screen (step 3 or 5 on page 4-18). 8 Touch the [OK] key. OK 141% 4 200% 100% A PA 400% touch the [PAPER SELECT] key 9 Ifandneeded, select the paper size. 0 A4 N APER PLAIN AUTO ORIGINAL AUTO EXPOSURE 5. A4 PAPER SELECT N PLAIN X-50% Y-70% COPY RATIO If the AUTO PAPER SELECT mode is on, the appropriate copy paper size will have been automatically selected based on the original size and selected copy ratios. 4-19 SPECIAL PAPERS Special papers including transparency film, postcards and tabbed paper must be fed through the bypass tray. the original in the document feeder 1 Place tray or on the document glass. (pages 4-3 5 Select the bypass tray. 0 to 4-6) A4 N HEAVY PAPER PAPER 5. A4 AUTO ORIGINAL AUTO EXPOSURE PAPER SELECT N 2 Load the special paper in the bypass tray. See page 2-12 for the specifications of paper that can be used in the bypass tray. For the paper loading instructions, see "Loading paper in the bypass tray" (page 210). [PAPER SELECT] key. 3 Touch theAUTO EXPOSURE 4 AUTO A4 PAPER SELECT 100% COPY the type and size of paper loaded in the 4 Set bypass tray. 0 A4 N 1 The (X) key shows the currently selected paper type. 2 The (Y) key shows the size of paper loaded in the bypass tray. AUTO ORIGINAL AUTO EXPOSURE HEAVY PAPER 5. A4 APER PAPER SELECT PLAIN N (X) 3 100% COPY RATIO (Y) To change the displayed paper type, touch the (X) key before touching the (Y) key. When loading paper, if you changed the paper size from an AB size to an inch size (or from an inch size to an AB size), or if you changed the paper type, be sure to change the paper type and size settings as explained in steps 5 to 7 on page 214, and steps 8 to 10 on page 2-15. 4-20 PLAIN 100% COPY RATIO any desired copy settings such as 6 Select the exposure or number of copies, and then press the [START] key. When copying from the document glass in the sort mode using the [START] key, touch the [READ-END] key after all originals have been scanned (step 7 on page 4-12). CHAPTER 5 CONVENIENT COPY FUNCTIONS This chapter explains special-purpose functions, storing of copy settings, and other convenient functions. Please select and read sections of this chapter as needed. Page SPECIAL MODES................................................................................... 5-2 ● General procedure for using special functions ................................ 5-2 ● Margin shift...................................................................................... 5-3 ● Erase............................................................................................... 5-4 ● Dual page copy ............................................................................... 5-5 ● Pamphlet copy................................................................................. 5-6 ● Job build.......................................................................................... 5-8 ● Tandem copy ................................................................................... 5-10 ● Covers/inserts ................................................................................. 5-12 ● Transparency film with insert sheets ............................................... 5-23 ● Multi shot......................................................................................... 5-24 ● Book copy ....................................................................................... 5-26 ● Tab copy .......................................................................................... 5-27 ● Card shot......................................................................................... 5-29 ● Mirror image .................................................................................... 5-31 ● B/W reverse..................................................................................... 5-31 ● Print menu....................................................................................... 5-32 STORING, USING AND DELETING JOB PROGRAMS ......................... 5-44 ● Storing a job program...................................................................... 5-44 ● Calling up a job program ................................................................. 5-45 ● Deleting a stored job program......................................................... 5-45 INTERRUPTING A COPY RUN .............................................................. 5-46 5-1 SPECIAL MODES Touch the [SPECIAL MODES] key in the main screen of copy mode to open the special modes screen. The following functions can be selected in the special modes screen. Touch the [SPECIAL MODES] key in the main screen. READY TO SCAN FOR COPY. 0 SPECIAL MODES ORIGINAL 2-SIDED COPY A4 OUTPUT 1. FILE 2. A4 3. 4. QUICK FILE B5 B4 A3 1 Margin shift (page 5-3) 2 Erase (page 5-4) 3 Dual page copy (page 5-5) 4 Pamphlet copy (page 5-6) 5 Job build (page 5-8) 6 Tandem copy (page 5-10) A4 OK SPECIAL MODES AUTO ORIGINAL A4 AUTO EXPOSURE MARGIN SHIFT AUTO A4 PAPER SELECT PAMPHLET COPY ERASE JOB BUILD DUAL PAGE COPY 1/3 TANDEM COPY 100% COPY RATIO 7 [OK] key on the special modes screen Touch the [OK] key to return to the main screen of copy mode. 8 / key Touch these keys to change the special modes screen. There are three special modes screens. Touch the key to change to the other two screens. ●The following special functions can be selected in the 2nd screen (2/3). Covers/inserts (page 5-12) Book copy (page 5-26) Transparency inserts (page 5-23) Tab copy (page 5-27) Multi shot (page 5-24) Card shot (page 5-29) ●The following special functions can be selected in the 3rd screen (3/3). Mirror image (page 5-31) B/W reverse (page 5-31) Print menu (page 5-32) General procedure for using special functions 1 Touch the [SPECIAL MODES] key. To select a special function in one of the other two screens, use the / keys to change the screen. SPECIAL MODES 2-SIDED COPY OUTPUT 2 Touch mode. the key for the desired special SPECIAL MODES MARGIN SHIFT PAMPHLET COPY 5-2 ERASE JOB BUILD Example: Selecting the shift function margin Setting procedures for modes requiring setting screens start on the next page. The dual page copy, job build, tandem copy, mirror image and B/W reverse functions do not require setting screens. SPECIAL MODES Margin shift The margin shift function will automatically shift the text or image on the copy paper approximately 10 mm (1/2") in its initial setting. This function is convenient when stapling or binding copies with a string. NOTE The initial setting for the margin width can be changed in the administrator settings to any value from 0 to 20 mm (0" to 1") (page 16 of the administrator settings guide). One-sided copying Image shifted Original to the right Image shifted to the left ●The shift direction can be selected from right or left shift as shown in the illustration. Margin Margin Two-sided copying Original Image shifted to the right Image shifted to the left 5 Or Margin Margin To display the special modes screen... See "General procedure for using special functions" on page 5-2. the shift amount as needed and touch 3 Set the [OK] key. OK CANCEL 1 Touch the [MARGIN SHIFT] key on the special modes screen. SPECIAL MODES MARGIN SHIFT PAMPHLET COPY 2 ERASE JOB BUILD The margin shift setting screen will appear. The margin shift icon ( ) will also appear in the upper left of the screen to indicate that the function is turned on. Select the shift direction. RIGHT LEFT Touch a shift direction key to select right or left. The selected key will be highlighted. SIDE 1 10 (0 mm OK SIDE 2 20) 10 (0 mm 1) Use the and the keys to set the shift amount. The shift amount can be set from 0 to 20 mm in 1 mm (0" to 1" in 1/8") increments. the [OK] key on the special modes 4 Touch screen. You will return to the main screen of copy mode. About the steps that follow If an automatic document feeder is being used, see pages 4-7 through 4-10. If the document glass is being used, see pages 4-11 through 413. To cancel the margin shift function, touch the [CANCEL] key on the margin shift setting screen (step 3). 5-3 SPECIAL MODES Erase The erase function is used to erase the shadow lines on copies produced when copying thick originals or books. The erase modes that can be selected are shown below. The erase width is approximately 10 mm (1/2") in it's initial setting. NOTE The initial setting for the erasure width can be changed in the administrator settings to any value from 0 to 20 mm (0" to 1") (page 16 of the administrator settings guide). Original Copy EDGE ERASE Eliminates shadow lines around the edges of copies caused when heavy paper or a book is used as an original. CENTRE ERASE Eliminates shadow lines produced by the bindings of bound documents. EDGE + CENTRE ERASE Eliminates shadow lines around the edges of copies and eliminates the shadow at the centre of copies. To display the special modes screen... See "General procedure for using special functions" on page 5-2. the amount of erase and touch the 3 Adjust [OK] key. CANCEL OK EDGE 1 Touch the [ERASE] key on the special modes screen. MODES RGIN SHIFT PHLET COPY 2 ERASE DUAL C JOB BUILD TAN C The erase setting screen will appear. The erase icon ( ) will also appear in the upper left of the screen to indicate that the function is turned on. Select the desired erase mode. ERASE EDGE ERASE CENTRE ERASE EDGE+CENTRE ERASE Select one of the three erase modes. The selected key will be highlighted. 10 (0 mm 20) Use the and keys to set the erase width to any value from 0 to 10 mm in increments of 1 mm (0" to 1" in 1/8"). the [OK] key on the special modes 4 Touch screen. You will return to the main screen of copy mode. About the steps that follow If an automatic document feeder is being used, see pages 4-7 through 4-10. If the document glass is being used, see pages 4-11 through 413. NOTE When erase is used, edge erase takes place at the edges of the original image. If you also use a ratio setting, the edge erase width will change according to the set ratio. To cancel the erase function, touch the [CANCEL] key on the erase setting screen (step 3). 5-4 SPECIAL MODES Dual page copy The dual page copy function produces separate copies of two documents placed side by side on the document glass. This function is especially useful when copying books and other bound documents. [Example] Copying right and left pages of a book Book original Dual page copy ●The dual page copy function can be used only when copying from the document glass. The automatic document feeder cannot be used with this function. ●Only 8-1/2" x 11" (A4) paper can be used. To display the special modes screen... See "General procedure for using special functions" on page 5-2. the [DUAL PAGE COPY] key on the 1 Touch special modes screen. OK 1/3 DUAL PAGE COPY RASE JOB BUILD TANDEM COPY The [DUAL PAGE COPY] key will be highlighted to indicate that the function is turned on, and the dual page copy icon ( ) will appear in the upper left of the screen. the [OK] key on the special modes 2 Touch screen. that A4 (8-1/2" x 11") size paper is 4 Ensure selected. AUTO A4 PAPER SELECT 100% If A4 (8-1/2" x 11") size paper is not selected, touch the [PAPER SELECT] key to select A4 (8-1/2" x 11") size paper. About the steps that follow For two-sided copying, follow steps 2 through 4 on page 4-13 and then follow steps 4 through 6 on page 4-12. For one-sided copying, follow steps 4 through 6 on page 4-12. You will return to the main screen of copy mode. 3 Place the originals on the document glass. When copying a thick book, press down lightly on the book to flatten it against the document glass. Index A4 NOTE To erase shadows caused by document binding, use the edge erase function (page 5-4). (Centre Erase and Edge + Centre Erase cannot be used in combination.) To cancel the dual page copy function, touch the [DUAL PAGE COPY] key on the special modes screen (screen of step 1). 81/2" x 11" This page is copied first. B5 A4(81/2" x 11") B4 (81/2" x 14") Centre line of original A3 (11" x 17") Place the opened original on the document glass so that the first page you wish to copy is on the right and the centre of the original is aligned with the size mark. 5-5 5 SPECIAL MODES Pamphlet copy The pamphlet copy function is used to arrange copies in proper order for eventual centre-stapling and folding into a booklet. Two original pages are copied onto each side of copy paper. Four pages are, therefore, copied onto one sheet. This function is convenient for arranging copies into an attractive booklet or pamphlet. NOTE To make pamphlet copies of a book or other bound original, use the book copy function (page 5-26). The book copy function scans the opened original in two-page units. (Two pages are scanned at each scan, reducing the number of repetitions of the scanning operation by a half.) [Example] Copying eight originals in the pamphlet copy mode Originals (one-sided) ● Scan the originals from the first page to the last page. The order of copying will be automatically adjusted by the machine. ● Either left binding (right to left turning) or right binding (left to right turning) can be selected. ● Four originals will be copied onto one sheet. Blank pages may be automatically produced at the end depending on the number of the originals. ● If a saddle stitch finisher is installed, copies can be stapled in two positions along the centre of copies and folded at the centre. Finished copies are folded in two. Left binding 1 2 3 4 5 6 First page 7 8 Originals (two-sided) 2 4 6 8 Right binding 1 3 First page 5 7 To display the special modes screen... See "General procedure for using special functions" on page 5-2. the binding position (left binding or 3 Select right binding). LEFT BINDING RIGHT BINDING C SE the [PAMPHLET COPY] key on the 1 Touch special modes screen. SPECIAL MODES MARGIN SHIFT PAMPHLET COPY ERASE JOB BUILD The PAMPHLET COPY setting screen will appear. The pamphlet copy icon ( , etc.) will also appear in the upper left corner of the screen to indicate that the function is turned on. the type of originals 2 Designate copied: 1-sided or 2-sided. ORIGINAL 1-SIDED 2-SIDED 5-6 to be Select the [2-SIDED] key if you wish to scan a twosided original using the automatic document feeding function. If you wish to insert a different type of paper for use as a cover, follow steps 4 through 12 below. If you do not wish to insert paper for a cover, continue from step 8 on the next page. 4 Touch the [COVER SETTING] key. CANCEL NG OK RIGHT BINDING COVER SETTING SPECIAL MODES whether or not you wish to copy on 5 Select the cover ("YES" or "NO"). the original in the document feeder 9 Place or on the document glass. (page 4-3) PRINT ON COVER YES that the desired paper size has 10 Ensure been automatically selected based on the NO original size. To select another size paper, select the desired size and touch the [AUTO IMAGE] key. The appropriate copy ratio will be selected 100% automatically based on the original size and the paper size. (See steps 2 and 3 on page 4-15.) AUTO A3 PAPER SELECT 6 Select the paper tray for the cover. The currently selected paper tray for the cover is displayed. 2 The size and type of paper in the currently selected tray is displayed. 1 CANCEL OK PAPER TRAY BYPASS TRAY A4 PLAIN In the example screen above, A4 (8-1/2" x 11") size plain paper is loaded. To change the paper tray for the cover, touch the tray selection key. (In the screen example, the "BYPASS TRAY" display is the tray selection key.) The tray selection screen appears when the tray selection key is touched. Select the desired tray in this screen. NOTES ● When the cover paper is fed from the inserter, the cover cannot be copied on. ● Two-sided copying is not possible on label sheets, transparency film, and tabbed paper. When copying on a cover, do not select a tray that has one of these types of paper. 7 Touch the [OK] key. CANCEL G OK RIGHT BINDING COVER SETTING 8 Touch the [OK] key. OK CANCEL LEFT BINDING OK RIGHT BINDING Return to the main screen of copy mode. any desired copy settings such as 11 Select the exposure or number of copies, and then press the [START] key. using 12 [When feeder:] the automatic document Copying will start after all originals have been scanned. (The next step is not needed.) [When using the document glass:] Replace the original with the next original and press the [START] key. Repeat this operation until all originals have been scanned and then touch the [READ-END] key. NOTES ● When the pamphlet copy function is set, the twosided copying mode will be automatically selected. ● If this function is used in combination with the pamphlet copy function (pamphlet stapling) and the number of origial pages exceeds the number of pages that can be stapled, a message asking you to select "CANCEL", "CONTINUE", or "DIVIDE" will appear. To cancel the job, select "CANCEL". To make pamphlet copies without stapling, select "CONTINUE". To divide the pages into sets that can be stapled, select "DIVIDE". If you performed steps 4 to 6 to insert cover paper, divided stapling is not possible. You can either continue pamphlet copying without stapling, or cancel the job. To cancel the pamphlet copy function, touch the [CANCEL] key on the pamphlet copy setting screen (step 2). COVER SETTING 5-7 5 SPECIAL MODES Job build Use job build mode when you need to copy more original pages than can be loaded at once in the document feeder (the maximum number of pages that can be loaded is 150). This function allows the original pages to be scanned in sets. [Example] Copying 300 pages of A4 originals Originals 1 1 A:150 sheets 300 original pages 151 B:150 sheets *Divide the originals into sets of 150 pages each. Scan the originals starting from the first page of set A. Scan set B next, taking care to keep the correct page order. To display the special modes screen... See "General procedure for using special functions" on page 5-2. sure that the desired paper size is 4 Make selected, select the number of copies or other copy settings, and [START] key. N SHIFT LET COPY DUAL COP ERASE JOB BUILD TANDE COPY The [JOB BUILD] key will be highlighted to indicate that the function is turned on, and the job build icon ( ) will appear in the upper left of the screen. the [OK] key on the special modes 2 Touch screen. OK Return to the main screen of copy mode. 1/3 DUAL PAGE COPY RASE 5 Touch the [READ-END] key. INTERRUPT ES TANDEM COPY JOB BUILD ORIGINAL 3 A4 PLACE NEXT ORIGINAL. PRESS [START]. TO CHANGE COPY SETTINGS, PRESS [CHANGE]. CHANGE Place the first set of originals in the document feeder tray. (page 4-3) the Scanning of originals will start. After scanning of the first set of originals (A in the example above) is completed, remove the scanned originals, place the next set of originals (set B in the example) and press the [START] key. Repeat this operation until all sets of originals have been scanned. If you wish to adjust the copy settings each time you place a set of originals, see "Changing the copy settings for each set of originals" on the next page. the [JOB BUILD] key on the special 1 Touch modes screen. ES press 4. READ-END A3 C To cancel the job build function, touch the [JOB BUILD] key on the special modes screen (step 1). The highlighted display will be cancelled. 5-8 SPECIAL MODES ■ Changing the copy settings for each set of originals When using job build mode, you can change the copy settings each time you place a set of originals. After performing step 4 on page 5-8, follow the steps below. 5 Touch the [CHANGE] key. 7 Touch the [READ-END] key. INTERRUPT ES ORIGINAL INTERRUPT ES A4 PLACE NEXT ORIGINAL. PRESS [START]. TO CHANGE COPY SETTINGS, PRESS [CHANGE]. CHANGE A4 PLACE NEXT ORIGINAL. PRESS [START]. TO CHANGE COPY SETTINGS, PRESS [CHANGE]. CHANGE READ-END 4. ORIGINAL 4. A3 C READ-END A3 C the desired copy settings in the 6 Select screen that appears and press the [START] key. INTERRUPT [START]. ORIGINAL A4 1. 2. A4 3. 4. B5 B4 A3 5. READ-END A4 AUTO EXPOSURE A4 AUTO A4 PAPER SELECT 100% COPY RATIO The copy settings that can be selected are "EXPOSURE", "PAPER SELECT", and "COPY RATIO". If you touch the [READEND] key now, copying will begin without scanning the new set of originals. 5 NOTES ● If the original size was set manually at the beginning of the job build procedure, it will not be possible to change the original size setting. If the automatic original detection function is operating, the original size will be detected for each set of originals placed. ● When the bypass tray is selected, it is not possible to change the paper type. ● If "XY ZOOM" was initially set for the ratio, it will not be possible to change the ratio setting. ● When job build mode is used in combination with any of the following functions, the [CHANGE] key will not appear in the screen of step 5. Pamphlet copy, tandem copy, covers/inserts, transparency inserts, multi-shot, book copy, tab copy, staple sort, saddle stitch 5-9 SPECIAL MODES Tandem copy Two machines connected to the same network can be used to run a large copy job in parallel. By dividing the job in half, approximately half the time is required to complete the job. To use this function, two machines must be connected to your network as network printers. Even if more machines are connected to the network, this function can only be used to have one other machine share a job. 100 sets of copies 50 sets of copies 50 sets of copies To display the special modes screen... See "General procedure for using special functions" on page 5-2. the [TANDEM COPY] key on the 1 Touch special modes screen. OK 1/3 ERASE DUAL PAGE COPY JOB BUILD TANDEM COPY The [TANDEM COPY] key will be highlighted to indicate that the function is turned on, and the tandem copy icon ( ) will appear in the upper left of the screen. the [OK] key on the special modes 2 Touch screen. OK RASE JOB BUILD 5-10 DUAL PAGE COPY TANDEM COPY 1/3 You will return to the main screen of copy mode. Server machine and client machine ●In the following explanations, the machine on which the copy job is initially set up and tandem copy selected is called the server machine. The other machine that is asked to share the job is called the client machine. ●To use the tandem copy function, the tandem settings must be configured in the administrator settings. (See page 14 of the "Administrator settings guide") ●When configuring the tandem settings in the server machine, the IP address of the client machine must be entered. For the port number, it is best to use the initial setting (50001). Unless you experience difficulty with this setting, do not change it. The tandem settings should be configured by your network administrator. If the server and client machines will alternate server and client roles, the IP address of the server machine must also be entered in the client machine.The same port number can be set in both machines. the number of copies with the numeric 3 Set keys. Up to 999 copies can be set. When the [START] key is pressed, the copies will automatically be divided between the server and client LOGOUT machines. If an odd number of copies is set, the server machine will make the extra set. If an incorrect number of copies is set... Press the clear key and set the correct number of copies. the original in the document feeder 4 Place or on the document glass. (page 4-3) SPECIAL MODES 5 Press the [START] key. To cancel the tandem copy function, touch the [TANDEM COPY] key on the special modes screen (step 1). The highlighted display will be cancelled. NOTES ● To perform tandem copying, the server machine and client machine must meet certain conditions. After the [START] key is pressed on the server machine, the server machine verifies that the conditions have been met. If the conditions have not been met, tandem copying does not begin and "TANDEM OUTPUT IS NOT ALLOWED. OUTPUT ALL SETS USING MASTER MACHINE?" appears in the display. To have the server machine make all the copies, touch the [OK] key. To cancel the job, touch the [CANCEL] key. • As an example, the following conditions must be met when a staple finisher is installed on the server machine and not on the client machine: (1) If tandem copying is executed for a twosided copy job with the number of copies set to 999 and "Non-staple" is selected, tandem copying will take place. (2) If tandem copying is executed for a twosided copy job with the number of copies set to 999 and "Staple" is selected, tandem copying will not take place because the client machine does not have a finisher. 5 ● After the [START] key is pressed, if the client machine cannot print because it is out of paper or other reason, the server machine will print its half of the job. The other half of the job will be stored in the client machine and the job will be printed when the client machine is able to print. ● If auditing mode is enabled on both the server and client machines, the same account number must be entered on both machines. ● If auditing mode is enabled on the client machine but not on the server machine, tandem copying cannot be performed. 5-11 SPECIAL MODES Covers/inserts A different type of paper can be inserted in positions corresponding to front and back covers of a copy job when the automatic document feeding function is used. A different type of paper can also be automatically added as an insert at specified pages. As an example, tabbed paper can be added as inserts at the beginning of chapters or at other pages to create an indexed document. ● Covers/inserts can be disabled in the administrator settings (page 11 of the administrator settings guide). Example of adding covers Example of adding inserts Originals Originals Back cover Front cover Inserts Example of adding covers and inserts Originals Back cover Front cover About the explanations of covers and inserts There are various ways of using covers and inserts. To keep the explanations simple, covers and inserts are explained separately. The procedure for inserting covers is explained on page 5-13. The procedure for adding inserts is explained on page 514. After reading these explanations, see the examples of using covers and inserts on pages 517 to 5-22. Inserts ■ Preparations for using covers and inserts ● Load the cover/insert paper in the tray before using the cover/insert function. ● Use the same size of paper for the covers/inserts as for the copies. (For the procedures for loading paper, see pages 2-2 to 2-17.) ● Before selecting the cover/insert function, place the originals in the document feeder, select one-sided or twosided copying, and select the number of copies and any other desired copy settings as explained on pages 47 to 4-10. When these settings have been completed, perform the procedure to select covers/inserts on the following page. ● The original must be scanned from the document feeder. The document glass cannot be used. ● Tabbed paper can be used for cover/ inserts, however, two-sided copying cannot be performed on the tabbed paper. Tabbed paper can be fed from the bypass tray, tray 3, and the inserter. The other trays cannot be used. ● Up to 100 covers/inserts can be inserted. Two covers/inserts cannot be inserted between the same pages. ● Pamphlet copying cannot be used in combination with covers/inserts. ● When performing two-sided copying of two-sided originals, an insert cannot be added between the front and back sides of an original page. 5-12 SPECIAL MODES ■ Procedure for inserting front and back cover paper The paper for the front cover is called the front cover paper ("FRONT COVER" in the touch panel). The paper for the back cover is called the back cover paper ("BACK COVER" in the touch panel). ●Examples of insertion methods for the front and back cover paper are given on pages 5-18 to 5-21. To display the special modes screen... See "General procedure for using special functions" on page 5-2. the insertion conditions for the front 5 Set cover paper. PLEASE SET UP A FRONT COVER. 0 CANCEL FRONT COVER SETTING the [COVERS/INSERTS] key in the 1 Touch special modes screen (2nd screen). PAPER TRAY PRINT ON FRONT COVER 1-SIDED YES BYPASS TRAY 2-SIDED NO A4 PLAIN SPECIAL MODES COVERS/INSERTS TRANSPARENCY INSERTS BOOK COPY TAB COPY 2 2 Touch the [PAPER TRAY SETTINGS] key. CANCEL COVERS/INSERTS FRONT COVER INSERTION TYPE A SETTING BACK COVER INSERTION TYPE B SETTING INSERTION SETTINGS OK PAPER TRAY SETTINGS PAGE LAYOUT 3 the tray used for the front cover 3 Select paper. OK PAPER TRAY SETTINGS FRONT COVER BACK COVER INSERTION TYPE A BYPASS TRAY BYPASS TRAY BYPASS TRAY BYPASS TRAY A4 PLAIN A4 PLAIN A4 PLAIN A4 PLAIN 1 2 INSERTION TYPE B (Y) (Z) Select whether or not the front cover paper is to be copied on with the (X) keys ([YES] or [NO]). Select whether one-sided copying or two-sided copying is to be performed on the front cover paper with the (Y) keys. This selection is only possible when the [YES] key of (X) has been selected. (The one-sided/two-sided selection made here only applies to the front cover paper. When the back cover paper is selected, the selection only applies to the back cover paper.) The (Z) key shows the tray selected for the front cover paper in step 3 and the paper size and type. the [OK] key in the screen of step 5. 6 Touch You will return to the screen of step 2. When you return to the screen of step 2, the [FRONT COVER] key will be highlighted. insert back cover paper, repeat steps 2 7 To through 6, using the [BACK COVER] key instead of the [FRONT COVER] key. The tray name (tray position) selected for the front cover paper and the paper size and type are shown in (X). If the tray in which you loaded paper for the front cover is shown, touch the [OK] key. You will return to the screen of step 2. If the correct tray for the cover sheet paper does not appear in (X), touch the (Y) key. The tray selection screen will appear. Select the tray in which you loaded paper for the front cover. You will return to the screen of above. the [FRONT 4 Touch screen of step 2. (Y) (X) 1 (X) OK COVER] key in the PLEASE SET UP COVERS/INSERTS. 0 OK SPECIAL MODES CANCEL COVERS/INSERTS FRONT COVER INSERTION TYPE A SETTINGS BACK COVER INSERTION TYPE B SETTINGS INSERTION SETTINGS OK PAPER TRAY SETTINGS PAGE LAYOUT the [PAGE LAYOUT] key in the 8 Touch screen of step 7 to display a list of the selected settings (page 5-16). To edit or delete a cover/insert, follow steps 1 and 2 on page 5-16. To exit the cover/insert settings, touch the upper [OK] key in the screen of step 7. 9 Press the [START] key. To cancel covers/inserts settings... Touch the [CANCEL] key in the screen of step 2. 5-13 5 SPECIAL MODES ■ Procedure for adding inserts You can have different paper automatically inserted as an insert at a specified pages. Two types of insert paper can be used. These are specified with the [INSERTION TYPE A SETTING] key and [INSERTION TYPE B SETTING] in the touch panel. Tabbed paper can be used as an insert. ●Examples of insertion methods for insert paper are given on page 5-22. To display the special modes screen... See "General procedure for using special functions" on page 5-2. the insertion conditions for insertion 5 Set type A . PRINT ON INSERT SHEETS 1 CANCEL INSERTION TYPE A SETTING Touch the [COVERS/INSERTS] key in the special modes screen (2nd screen). YES 1-SIDED 2-SIDED OK PAPER TRAY BYPASS TRAY NO A4 PLAIN TAB COPY SPECIAL MODES (X) COVERS/INSERTS TRANSPARENCY INSERTS BOOK COPY TAB COPY 1 2 2 Touch the [PAPER TRAY SETTINGS] key. CANCEL COVERS/INSERTS FRONT COVER INSERTION TYPE A SETTING BACK COVER INSERTION TYPE B SETTING INSERTION SETTINGS OK PAPER TRAY SETTINGS 3 PAGE LAYOUT 4 3 Select the tray used for insertion type A. OK PAPER TRAY SETTINGS FRONT COVER BACK COVER INSERTION TYPE A BYPASS TRAY BYPASS TRAY BYPASS TRAY BYPASS TRAY A4 PLAIN A4 PLAIN A4 PLAIN A4 PLAIN (X) 1 2 INSERTION TYPE B (Y) The tray name (tray position) selected for insertion type A and the paper size and type are shown in (X). If the tray in which you loaded paper for insertion type A is shown, touch the [OK] key. You will return to the screen of step 2. If the correct tray for insertion type A does not appear in (X), touch the (Y) key. The tray selection screen will appear. Select the tray in which you loaded paper for insertion type A. You will return to the screen of step 2. the [INSERTION TYPE A SETTING] 4 Touch key in the screen of step 2 5-14 (Y) (Z) Select whether or not insertion type A paper is to be copied on with the (X) keys ([YES] or [NO]). Select whether one-sided copying or two-sided copying is to be performed on insertion type A with the (Y) keys. This selection is only possible when the [YES] key of (X) has been selected. (The one-sided/two-sided selection made here only applies to insertion type A paper. When insertion type B is selected, the selection only applies to insertion type B paper.) The (Z) key shows the tray selected for insertion type A in step 3 and the paper size and type. If a paper tray with tabbed paper is selected in the screen of step 3, you can touch the [TAB COPY] key. This allows you to select the tab width. Twosided copying is not possible on tabbed paper. the [OK] key in the screen of step 5. 6 Touch You will return to the screen of step 2. When you return to the screen of step 2, the [INSERTION TYPE A SETTING] key will be highlighted. wish to insert a different paper with 7 Iftheyou[INSERTION TYPE B SETTING] key, repeat steps 2 through 6. Use the [INSERTION TYPE B SETTING] key instead of the [INSERTION TYPE A SETTING] key, and the [INSERTION TYPE B] key instead of the [INSERTION TYPE A] key. OK CANCEL TS INSERTION TYPE A SETTING INSERTION TYPE B SETTING INSERTION SETTINGS OK PAPER TRAY SETTINGS PAGE LAYOUT SPECIAL MODES the [INSERTION SETTINGS] key to 8 Touch specify the pages where you wish to insert wish to insert a different paper with 11 Iftheyou[INSERTION TYPE B SETTING] key, the insert papers of [INSERTION TYPE A SETTING] and [INSERTION TYPE B SETTING]. repeat steps 2 through 6. Use the [INSERTION TYPE B SETTING] key instead of the [INSERTION TYPE A SETTING] key, and the [INSERTION TYPE B] key instead of the [INSERTION TYPE A] key. CANCE RTION SETTING INSERTION SETTINGS TION SETTING OK INSERTION TYPE A SETTING INSERTION TYPE B SETTING the [INSERTION TYPE A] key or the 9 Touch [INSERTION TYPE B] key, enter the page number where you wish to insert the insert paper with the numeric keys, and then touch the [ENTER] key. INPUT THE PAGE NUMBER AND PRESS [ENTER]. USE [C] KEY TO AMEND. OK INSERTION SETTINGS INSERTION PAGE INSERTION TOTAL:0 3 ENTER (X) 1 2 3 4 INSERTION TYPE A INSERTION TYPE B BYPASS TRAY A4 PLAIN BYPASS TRAY A4 PLAIN (Y) (Z) OK CANCEL TS INSERTION SETTINGS PAPER TRAY SETTINGS PAGE LAYOUT the [PAGE LAYOUT] key in the 12 Touch screen of step 11 to display a list of the selected settings (page 5-16). To edit or delete a cover/insert, follow steps 1 and 2 on page 5-16. To exit the cover/insert settings, touch the upper [OK] key in the screen of step 11. 13 Press the [START] key. To cancel covers/inserts settings... Touch the [CANCEL] key in the screen of step 2. (X) shows the total number of inserts. Up to 100 inserts can be added. When inserting multiple inserts, touch the [ENTER] key after each entry of an insertion page number (insertion position) with the numeric keys. (Y) shows the tray selected in step 3 for [INSERTION TYPE A SETTING] and the paper size and type. (Z) shows the tray selected in step 3 for [INSERTION TYPE B SETTING] and the paper size and type. When the [INSERTION TYPE A] key is highlighted, the insert settings apply to [INSERTION TYPE A SETTING]. When the [INSERTION TYPE B] key is highlighted, the insert settings apply to [INSERTION TYPE B SETTING]. the [OK] key in the screen of step 9. 10 Touch You will return to the screen of step 2. When you return to the screen of step 2, the [INSERTION TYPE A SETTING] key will be highlighted. 5-15 5 SPECIAL MODES ■ Checking, editing, and deleting cover/insert pages The [PAGE LAYOUT] key appears after covers/inserts settings are configured (the settings of step 1 through step 7 on pages 5-13 and 5-14). The [PAGE LAYOUT] key is used for the following: ● To display the status of covers/inserts pages ● To edit, delete, or add inserted pages 3 To edit or delete an inserted page, touch the key To display the [PAGE LAYOUT] key... of the page you wish to edit or delete in the page Configure the settings in step 1 through step 7 layout screen. When the key is touched, the on pages 5-13 and 5-14. [CANCEL], [DELETE], and [AMEND] keys appear. 1 Touch the [PAGE LAYOUT] key. AMEND THE INSERTION? OK INSERTION TYPE A SETTING INSERTION TYPE B SETTING 2 INSERTION SETTINGS CANCEL OK CANCEL TS OK PAGE LAYOUT 1/2 INSERTION TYPE A <4 INSERTION TYPE B 7/8 INSERTION TYPE A 12/- 1 If there are multiple screens, touch the key to change screens. 2 Displayed icons: : Front side copy only : Back side copy only : Two-sided copy : No copying For inserts, the insertion page also appears. " " represents a page number. /- : Front side copy only at page / 5-16 AMEND PAGE LAYOUT The set covers/inserts pages are shown. FRONT COVER DELETE PAPER TRAY SETTINGS : Two-sided copy at page / -/ : Back side copy only at page < : Insert non-copied insert at page or ●To cancel, touch the [CANCEL] key. ●To delete an inserted page, touch the [DELETE] key. ●To edit an inserted page, touch the [AMEND] key. The screen of step 5 on page 5-13 or the screen of step 5 on page 5-14 appears. Edit the page as explained in step 5 on page 5-13 or step 5 on page 5-14. you have finished 3 When pages, touch the [OK] key. OK INSERTION TYPE B BYPASS checking the SPECIAL MODES ■ Examples of covers and inserts The relations between the originals and finished copies when covers or inserts are inserted are shown on the following pages. Covers ●Two-sided copying of one-sided originals ●One-sided copying of one-sided originals (page 5-19) (page 5-18) ●Two-sided copying of two-sided originals ●One-sided copying of two-sided originals (page 5-21) (page 5-20) Inserts ●One-sided copying of one-sided originals (page 5-22) ●One-sided copying of two-sided originals (page 5-22) ●Two-sided copying of one-sided originals (page 5-22) ●Two-sided copying of two-sided originals (page 5-22) ■ Symbols used for covers and inserts 6 6 6 Inserts Back cover copied on. 1 not Back cover after two-sided copying. (One page is not copied on.) Back cover after two-sided copying. Icon appearing in display 1 6 5 5 one-sided Insert after one-sided copying. (One page is not copied on.) 3 3 Back cover after one-sided copying of one-sided original. Insert after copying. 3 Front cover after two-sided copying. when Meaning Insert when not copied on. 4 2 Front cover Front cover after two-sided copying. (One page is not copied on.) 1 Back cover not Front cover after one-sided copying. 1 5 when Symbol Insert after copying. two-sided One-sided original or output page of regular onesided copying 2 Front cover copied on. 1 Icon appearing in display Meaning Type Symbol Other Type The following symbols are used to make the explanations easier to understand. The numbers that appear indicate relations between the originals and copies, and will vary depending on the settings. Two-sided original or output page of regular twosided copying. One-sided original or output page of regular onesided copying. One-sided original or output page of regular onesided copying. 5-17 SPECIAL MODES ■ Covers (One-sided copying of one-sided originals) One-sided copies are made of the following one-sided originals. 1st page 1 2nd page 2 3rd page 4th page 3 5th page 4 6th page 5 6 Copying on cover Resulting copies One-sided copying No copying Two-sided copying No copying No copying 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 3 4 5 6 One-sided copying 1 2 3 4 5 Two-sided copying 1 2 3 4 5 No copying One-sided copying One-sided copying 1 2 3 4 5 One-sided copying Two-sided copying 1 2 3 4 5 Two-sided copying One-sided copying 1 3 4 5 Two-sided copying Two-sided copying 1 3 4 5 5-18 6 6 6 6 6 2 2 1 6 No copying 6 No copying 2 Back cover 2 Front cover SPECIAL MODES ■ Covers (Two-sided copying of one-sided originals) Two-sided copies are made of the following one-sided originals. 1st page 1 2nd page 2 3rd page 4th page 3 5th page 4 6th page 5 6 Copying on cover One-sided copying 1 No copying Two-sided copying 1 No copying One-sided copying One-sided copying 1 2 One-sided copying Two-sided copying 1 2 Two-sided copying One-sided copying 1 2 3 Two-sided copying Two-sided copying 1 3 3 2 1 4 6 5 6 No copying 2 4 Two-sided copying 1 5 5 No copying 3 6 One-sided copying 1 2 No copying 3 No copying 4 Back cover 2 Resulting copies Front cover 6 6 6 6 5 5 6 4 5 4 3 4 4 3 4 5 5 2 3 5 6 2 3 4 5 5-19 SPECIAL MODES ■ Covers (One-sided copying of Two-sided originals) One-sided copies are made of the following two-sided originals. 5 Copying on cover No copying One-sided copying No copying Two-sided copying No copying No copying 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 3 4 5 6 One-sided copying 1 2 3 4 5 Two-sided copying 1 2 3 4 5 No copying One-sided copying One-sided copying 1 2 3 4 5 One-sided copying Two-sided copying 1 2 3 4 5 Two-sided copying One-sided copying 1 3 4 5 Two-sided copying Two-sided copying 1 3 4 5 5-20 6 6 6 6 6 2 2 1 6 No copying Resulting copies 2 Back cover 2 Front cover 6 3 3rd page 6 2nd page 4 1 2 1st page SPECIAL MODES ■ Covers (Two-sided copying of two-sided originals) Two-sided copies are made of the following two-sided originals. 5 Copying on cover 2 3 One-sided copying One-sided copying 1 3 4 One-sided copying Two-sided copying 1 3 4 Two-sided copying One-sided copying 1 2 3 4 Two-sided copying Two-sided copying 1 3 4 4 3 5 6 6 5 5 6 5 6 4 2 5 6 Two-sided copying 1 No copying 3 6 One-sided copying 1 No copying 1 5 5 6 No copying 3 6 Two-sided copying 1 3 6 No copying 2 One-sided copying 1 4 No copying 4 No copying 2 Back cover 2 Resulting copies Front cover 4 3 3rd page 6 2nd page 4 1 2 1st page 5-21 SPECIAL MODES ■ Inserts (One-sided copying of one-sided originals) One-sided and two-sided copying is performed using the following one-sided originals. The insert is added as the third page. 1 3rd page 2 4th page 3 Copying on insert 5th page 4 6th page 5 6 Resulting copies (two-sided copying) 2 Two-sided copying 1 2 5 3 4 5 6 3 5 6 6 1 4 1 4 5 3 4 5 One-sided copying 3 6 3 5 6 2 3 2 1 2 Resulting copies (one-sided copying) 6 2nd page 2 1st page 1 1 4 4 No copying ■ Inserts (One-sided copying of two-sided originals) One-sided and two-sided copying is performed using the following two-sided originals. 2 One-sided copying 1 2 Two-sided copying 1 2 3 4 5 3 4 5 6 3 5 6 6 1 3 2 1 5-22 3 5 6 3 5 6 4 1 2 1 2 4 No copying 5 6 Resulting copies (two-sided copying) Resulting copies (one-sided copying) 4 Copying on insert 5 6 3 3rd page 4 1 2nd page 2 1st page SPECIAL MODES Transparency film with insert sheets When copying onto transparency film, blank insert sheets can be placed between transparent sheets. Example: Inserting insert sheets between transparencies ● This function only operates in "one-sided to onesided" and "two-sided to one-sided" modes. ● Multiple copies cannot be selected in this mode. ● The inserts are inserted under each transparency as shown at left. ● Select insert paper that is the same size as the transparencies. ● When feeding insert paper from an inserter, copying on the insert paper is not possible. ● Transparencies can be fed from the bypass tray or tray 3. ● If the transparencies are loaded in tray 3, be sure to set the paper size and paper type as explained on pages 2-14 and 2-15. Originals (1-sided) Originals (2-sided) Insert sheets Two-sided originals are only supported when automatic document feeding is used. Inserts can copied on. also be If the transparencies are loaded in tray 3, steps 1 to 5 below are not necessary. 4 Touch the [OK] key. TYPE TYPE/SIZE SETTING OK SIZE transparency film into the bypass 1 Load tray. Remove any paper already in the bypass tray before loading the transparency film. (To load paper in the bypass tray, see pages 2-10 and 2-11.) the [PAPER SELECT] key in the 2 Touch main screen and select the bypass tray 0 2. B5 A4 PLAIN PLAIN HEAVY PAPER 5. 81/2X11 AUTO-AB A4,B5 SIZE INPUT NON STANDARD SIZE 2/2 If the paper size was changed from an inch size to an AB size, or from an AB size to an inch size, be sure to set the paper type and size as explained on steps 5 to 7 on page 2-14 and steps 8 to 10 on page 2-15. 5 Select the bypass tray. paper type in the paper setting screen (touch (X) below). FOR COPY. AUTO-INCH 0 A4 N AUTO ORIGINAL Y AUTO EXPOSURE N PLAIN 5. AUTO ORIGINAL AUTO EXPOSURE A4 PAPER SELECT PLAIN 100% COPY RATIO A4 PAPER SELECT PLAIN PLAIN 100% COPY RATIO (X) 3 Touch the [TRANSPARENCY] key. TYPE. LETTER HEAD HEAVY PAPER PRE-PUNCHED LABELS COLOUR TRANSPARENCY To display the special modes screen... See "General procedure for using special functions" on page 5-2. the [TRANSPARENCY INSERTS] 6 Touch key in the special modes screen (2nd screen). SPECIAL MODES COVERS/INSERTS TRANSPARENCY INSERTS BOOK COPY TAB COPY The Transparency inserts setting screen will appear. The transparency inserts icon ( , etc.) will also appear in the upper left corner of the screen to indicate that the function is turned on. 5-23 5 SPECIAL MODES the insertion conditions for the insert 7 Set paper. OK CANCEL PRINT ON INSERT SHEETS YES NO You will return to the main screen of copy mode. OK INSERTION SHEET TRAY5 A4 PLAIN (X) the outer [OK] key in the screen of 8 Touch step 7. (Y) 1 Select whether or not the insert paper will be copied on with the (X) keys ([YES] or [NO]). If [YES] is selected, insert paper cannot be fed from an inserter. 2 The (Y) key shows the tray selected for the insert paper and the paper size and type. To select a different tray, touch this key to display the tray selection screen and select the tray that has the insert paper. NOTE If insert paper is fed from an inserter, the output will be delivered to the finisher (or saddle stitch finisher). About the steps that follow If an automatic document feeder is being used, see pages 4-7 through 4-10. If the document glass is being used, see pages 4-11 through 413. To cancel the Transparency film with insert sheets function, touch the [CANCEL] key on the Transparency film with insert sheets setting screen. Multi shot Multiple original pages can be copied onto one sheet of copy paper in a uniform layout. Select 2in1 to copy two original pages onto one sheet, or 4in1 to copy four original pages onto one sheet. This function is convenient when you wish to present multiple pages in a compact format, or show a view of all pages in a document. [Example] Copying 4 original pages onto one sheet of paper (Page number : 4in1, layout : left top : right top (see the next page)) One-sided copies one-sided originals ● When using the multi shot function, place the originals, select the desired paper size, and select the copying mode before selecting the multi shot function on the special modes screen. from Copies One-sided copies two-sided originals 5-24 from ● When using the multi shot function, the appropriate copy ratio will be automatically set based on the original size, paper size, and the number of originals to be copied onto one sheet. The minimum reduction ratio is 25%. The original size, copy paper size, and selected number of original pages may require that the ratio be less than 25%. As copying will take place at 25% in this case, part of the original images may be cut off. SPECIAL MODES To display the special modes screen... See "General procedure for using special functions" on page 5-2. the [MULTI SHOT] key in the special 1 Touch modes screen (2nd screen). TRANSPARENCY INSERTS MULTI SHOT TAB COPY CARD SHOT The MULTI SHOT setting screen will appear. A multi shot icon ( , etc.) will also appear in the upper left of the screen to indicate that the function is turned on. the number of images to be copied 2 Select onto one sheet of copy paper. If needed, the orientation of the copy paper and the orientation of the images will be rotated. SPECIAL MODES MULTI SHOT 2in1 4in1 the [OK] key (inside [OK] key) on 4 Touch the multi shot setting screen. You will return to the special modes screen. the [OK] key in the special modes 5 Touch screen. You will return to the main screen of copy mode. About the steps that follow If an automatic document feeder is being used, see pages 4-7 through 4-10. If the document glass is being used, see pages 4-11 through 4-13. To cancel the multi shot function, touch the [CANCEL] key in the multi shot setting screen (the screen of step 2). 3 Select the layout. OK CANCEL LAYOUT Shot number OK 5 Select the order in which the originals will be arranged on the copy. Layout 2in1 4in1 The arrows in the above diagram indicate the directions in which the images are arranged. 5-25 SPECIAL MODES Book copy This function is convenient when you wish to compile copies of books or other bound originals into an attractive pamphlet format. The two pages of the open book are scanned as a set, and two pages each are copied onto the front and back sides of the copy paper (four pages are copied onto one sheet of copy paper). This allows the copies to be folded down the centre and made into a pamphlet. [Example] Book copying an 8-page pamphlet Originals ● Scan the originals from the first page to the last page. The order of copying will be automatically adjusted by the machine. ● Either left binding (right to left turning) or right binding (left to right turning) can be selected. ● Four originals will be copied onto one sheet. Blank pages may be automatically produced at the end depending on the number of the originals. ● If a saddle stitch finisher is installed, book copy can be used in combination with the pamphlet function to staple and fold the copies at the centreline. Finished copies are folded in two. Left binding First page First page Right binding First page First page To display the special modes screen... See "General procedure for using special functions" on page 5-2. the [BOOK COPY] key in the special 1 Touch modes screen (2nd screen). SPECIAL MODES COVERS/INSERTS TRANSPARENCY INSERTS BOOK COPY TAB COPY You will return to the main screen of copy mode. the originals on the document glass. 5 Place (page 4-3) Scan the original pages in the following order: Opened front and back cover Opened inside of front cover and 1st page Opened 2nd and 3rd page The BOOK COPY setting screen will appear. The book copy icon ( , etc.) will also appear in the upper left corner of the screen to indicate that the function is turned on. whether the book opens to the left or 2 Select to the right, and touch the [OK] key in the book copy setting screen. LEFT BINDING the [OK] key in the special modes 4 Touch screen. Opened last page and inside of back cover sure that the desired paper size has 6 Make been selected. You will return to the special modes screen. RIGHT BINDING AUTO A3 PAPER SELECT CO SET If the desired paper size is not selected, select the desired size. 100% 3 Select any desired cover settings. CANCEL NG OK RIGHT BINDING COVER SETTING If you wish to use a different type of paper for the cover, perform steps 4 to 12 on pages 5-6 to 57. If you do not wish to use a different type of paper, continue from step 4. the number of copies and any other 7 Select desired copy settings, and then press the 8 [START] key. Place the next two pages and press the [START] key. Repeat until all pages have been scanned, and then touch the [READEND] key. When book copy is selected, two-sided copying is automatically selected. To cancel the book copy function, touch the [CANCEL] key in the book copy setting screen (the screen of step 2). 5-26 SPECIAL MODES Tab copy Copying is possible on the tabs of tabbed paper. Prepare appropriate originals for the tab captions. [Example] Original Tabbed paper Copy Area A INDEX INDEX Area B Tab width A4 : Maximum of 20 mm (8-1/2" x 11" : Maximum of 5/8") ●The tab caption is shifted by the amount of the tab width setting, so keep areas A and B blank. Relations between originals and tabbed paper Left binding (normal top-bottom) Prepare originals these Originals placed face up in the document feeder (Normal orderA-E) Leading edge of original (Normal orderA-E) Originals placed on the document glass Tabbed paper Right binding (Inverted top-bottom) 5 (Normal orderA-E) Originals Right binding (Inverted top-bottom) Load tabbed paper in the bypass tray or tray 3 (Normal orderA-E) 1 2 3 4 5 Leading edge of original Leading edge of original (Reverse orderE-A) (Reverse orderE-A) (Normal orderA-E) (Normal order A-E) Feeding direction (Reverse orderE-A) Feeding direction Feeding direction Result (Top-bottom normal) (Top-bottom reversed) (Top-bottom reversed) 5-27 SPECIAL MODES To display the special modes screen... See "General procedure for using special functions" on page 5-2. the [TAB COPY] key in the special 1 Touch modes screen (2nd screen). SPECIAL MODES COVERS/INSERTS TRANSPARENCY INSERTS BOOK COPY TAB COPY The TAB COPY setting screen will appear. A tab copy icon ( ) will also appear in the upper left corner of the screen to indicate that the function is turned on. necessary, set the image shift width (tab) 2 Ifand touch the [OK] key. OK CANCEL OK IMAGE SHIFT 10 (0 mm 20) Set the image shift width (tab) with the and keys. The width can be set from 0 to 20 mm (0 to 5/8") in increments of 1 mm (1/8"). the [OK] key in the special modes 3 Touch screen. You will return to the main screen of copy mode. 4 Load tabbed paper in the bypass tray. Place the tabbed paper so that the edges with the tabs are the trailing edge. To use tab paper in tray 3, set the paper type setting of tray 3 to "TAB PAPER" in the tray settings of the system settings (page 2-14). To load tabbed paper in tray 3, see "Loading tabbed paper" on page 2-6. NOTE The width of the tabbed paper can be up to A4 width (210 mm) + 20 mm (or 8-1/2" x 11" width (8-1/2") + 5/8"). 5-28 "TAB PAPER" for the paper type 5 Select setting. The paper type setting is explained in “Setting the paper type and paper size” (page 2-14). If you are using tray 3, see “Setting the paper size when a special size is loaded” (page 2-17). About the steps that follow If an automatic document feeder is being used, see pages 4-7 through 4-10. If the document glass is being used, see pages 4-11 through 413. When performing tab copying with a right binding If you are using left-binding tabbed paper for a right binding, either stack the sheets in reverse order or scan the originals in reverse order.(See the table on the previous page.) To cancel the tab copy function, touch the [CANCEL] key in the tab copy setting screen (the screen of step 2). SPECIAL MODES Card shot When copying a card, this function allows you to combine the front and back sides on a single sheet of paper. Original ● Copying is only possible on standard size paper. ● A copy ratio cannot be selected when using this function. ● The image cannot be rotated when using this function. Copy CARD CARD Front of card CARD Back of card Example: Portrait A4 (8-1/2") size Example: Landscape A4 (8-1/2") size the [PAPER SELECT] key and then 1 Touch select the desired paper size. READY TO SCAN FOR COPY. 1. A4 2. B5 PLAIN PLAIN 3. A4 HEAVY PAPER 4. A3 PLAIN A4 PLAIN The selected paper size key is highlighted and the paper selection screen closes. the X dimension (width) and Y 3 Enter dimension (length) of the original with the keys. CANCEL OK 5 SIZE RESET 5. A4 PLAIN FIT TO PAGE NOTE If paper of the desired size is not loaded in any tray, load paper of the required size in a paper tray or the bypass tray. (See "Setting the paper type and paper size" on page 2-14.) To display the special modes screen... See "General procedure for using special functions" on page 5-2. the [CARD SHOT] key in the special 2 Touch modes screen (2nd screen). TRANSPARENCY INSERTS MULTI SHOT TAB COPY CARD SHOT ●X (width) is initially selected. Enter X and then touch the Y ( ) key to enter Y. ●To return the X and Y values to the initial settings configured in the administrator settings, touch the [SIZE RESET] key. (See "CARD SHOT SETTINGS" on page 16 of the administrator settings guide.) ●To have the images enlarged or reduced by a suitable ratio based on the entered original size so that the front and back sides fit into the selected paper size, touch the [FIT TO PAGE] key. The CARD SHOT setting screen will appear. A card shot icon ( , etc.) will also appear in the upper left corner of the screen to indicate that the function is turned on. 5-29 SPECIAL MODES 4 Touch the outer [OK] key. OK CANCEL OK You will return to the main screen of copy mode. the back side of the original face 8 Place down on the document glass (see step 5). 9 Press the [START] key. SIZE RESET The back side of the card is scanned. FIT TO PAGE 5 Place the original on the document glass. Place the front side of the original face down and close the document cover. 10Touch the [READ-END] key. NOTE steps 4 through 5 of "Copying from 6 Follow the document glass" (page 4-12). 7 Press the [START] key. The front side of the card is scanned. 5-30 The original must be placed on the document glass. The document feeder (automatic document feeding function) cannot be used. To cancel the card shot function, touch the [CANCEL] key in the card shot setting screen (the screen of step 4). SPECIAL MODES Mirror image This function is used to print a mirror image of the original. The images will be inverted in the right to left direction on the copies. Original Copy the [OK] key on the special modes 2 Touch screen. To display the special modes screen... See "General procedure for using special functions" on page 5-2. the [MIRROR IMAGE] key in 1 Touch special modes screen (3rd screen). ECIAL MODES MIRROR IMAGE B/W REVERSE You will return to the main screen of copy mode. the The [MIRROR IMAGE] key will be highlighted to indicate that the function is turned on, and the mirror image icon ( ) will appear in the upper left of the screen. About the steps that follow If an automatic document feeder is being used, see pages 4-7 through 4-10. If the document glass is being used, see pages 4-11 through 413. To cancel the mirror image function, touch the [MIRROR IMAGE] key in the special modes screen (the screen of step 1). B/W reverse Black and white are reversed in the copy to create a negative image. NOTES ● When this function is selected, the exposure mode setting (page 4-14) automatically changes to "Text". ● Originals with large black areas (which use a large amount of toner) can be printed with black/white reverse to reduce toner consumption. Original B/W reverse copy the [OK] key in the special modes 2 Touch screen. To display the special modes screen... See "General procedure for using special functions" on page 5-2. the [B/W REVERSE] key in 1 Touch special modes screen (3rd screen). ECIAL MODES MIRROR IMAGE B/W REVERSE You will return to the main screen of copy mode. the The [B/W REVERSE] key will be highlighted to indicate that the function is turned on, and the mirror image icon ( ) will appear in the upper left of the screen. About the steps that follow If an automatic document feeder is being used, see pages 4-7 through 4-10. If the document glass is being used, see pages 4-11 through 413. To cancel the B/W reverse function, touch the [B/W REVERSE] key in the special modes screen (the screen of step 1). 5-31 5 SPECIAL MODES Print menu The date, a stamp, page numbers, and entered text can be printed on copies. Four selections are available for the PRINT MENU: • Date print (page 5-35) • Stamp (page 5-36) This prints the date on the paper. [Example] Printing 2010/APR/4 in the upper righthand corner of the paper Print a message such as "CONFIDENTIAL" in reverse text on the paper. [Example] Printing "CONFIDENTIAL" in the upper right-hand corner of the paper 2010/APR/4 The format of the date and the character that separates the year, month, and day can be changed. • Page numbering (page 5-37) CONFIDENTIAL One of 12 stamps can be selected. • Text (page 5-41) Page numbers can be printed on copies. [Example] Printing page numbers in the bottom righthand corner of the paper Entered text can be printed. [Example] Printing "Meeting" in the upper left-hand corner of the paper Meeting Up to 50 characters can be printed. You can store up to 30 sequences of frequently used text. The format of the page number can be changed. Six printing positions are available: left, centre, or right of the top or bottom of the page. Each printing position is divided into an area for the date, page number, and text (A below), and an area for the stamp (B below). Top left Top centre Bottom left Top right Print menu Printing area Maximum number of settings DATE A One position only STAMP B 6 positions PAGE NUMBERING A One position only TEXT A 6 positions Bottom right Bottom centre NOTES ● A part that overlaps the printed text will not be copied. ● If the set text content overlaps the print content of another position, the central print content will be moved to the bottom, the content on the left will be next, and the content on the right will be placed on top in that order such that only the content visible at the top is printed. Content that is hidden due to overlapping will not be printed. ● The printed text will be printed at the set size regardless of the copy ratio or paper size. ● The printed text will also be printed at the set density regardless of the copy exposure. ● Some copy paper sizes may cause the printed contents to be cut off or the print position to shift. ● If a copy job with a print menu setting is saved using the document filing function, the print menu setting will not be saved. If you wish to print a file saved in copy mode and use a print menu setting, use the special modes in the Job settings / print screen (or the document filing print screen in the Web page if the machine is connected to a network) to select the print menu setting. (A print menu setting cannot be selected when printing a file saved in a mode other than copy mode.) 5-32 SPECIAL MODES ■ Common operation procedure for using the print menu To display the special modes screen... See "General procedure for using special functions" on page 5-2. the [PRINT MENU] key in the special 1 Touch modes screen (3rd screen). B/W REVERSE The print menu setting screen will appear. The print menu icon ( ) will also appear in the upper left corner of the screen to indicate that the function is turned on. PRINT MENU 2 Select the print position. SPECIAL MODES LAYOU PRINT MENU N Six positions are available: left, centre, or right of the top or bottom of the page. The touched key is highlighted. The keys indicating the print position appear as follows depending on the state of the setting: Not selected, print menu setting has not been selected. select print menu settings at another 4 To print position, repeat steps 2 and 3. NOTES ● If the [DATE], [PAGE NUMBERING], or [TEXT] key is touched when other than a "STAMP" print menu setting has been selected for the print position selected in step 2, a message will appear. To overwrite the previously set print content of the print menu that you touched, touch the [YES] key. To keep the previous settings, touch the [NO] key. ● The "DATE" and "PAGE NUMBERING" cannot be set in multiple positions. If either of these keys is touched when a date or page numbering setting has already been configured, a message will appear asking you if you wish to move the print settings to the position that you selected in step 2. To move the print settings, touch the [YES] key. Otherwise touch the [NO] key. 5 Touch the key. LAYOUT OK CANCEL 1/2 DATE STAMP PAGE NUMBERING TEXT specify the orientation of the original, 6 To touch the [ORIGINAL ORIENTATION] key. PRINT MENU Selected during selection of the print menu setting. Not selected, print menu setting has already been selected. The image displayed within each key varies depending on the key position. 3 Select the print menu. OK LAYOUT CANCEL OK 1/2 DATE PAGE NUMBERING STAMP TEXT OK SPECIAL MODES ORIGINAL ORIENTATION LAYOUT CANCEL 2-SIDED ORIGINAL TYPE OK 2/2 PRINT ON COVERS/INSERTS WHEN COPYING ON COVERS/INSERTS If you placed a two-sided original, touch the [ ] key to specify the binding style (book or tablet). The icon of the selected binding style is highlighted. you are adding covers or inserts, select 7 Ifwhether or not you wish to print on the The settings screen of the print menu appears. For information on each of the print menus, see the settings of each. ● DATE (page 5-35) ● STAMP (page 5-36) ● PAGE NUMBERING (page 5-37) ● TEXT (page 541) covers or inserts. OK SPECIAL MODES PRINT MENU ORIGINAL ORIENTATION LAYOUT CANCEL 2-SIDED ORIGINAL TYPE OK 2/2 PRINT ON COVERS/INSERTS WHEN COPYING ON COVERS/INSERTS If you do not wish to print on covers or inserts, touch the checkbox to remove the checkmark. NOTES ● If you are not copying on covers or inserts, printing will not take place on these even if a checkmark appears. ● A page number is never printed on covers or inserts, regardless of the above setting. ● If covers/inserts have been disabled in the administrator settings, the checkbox will be greyed out to prevent selection. 5-33 5 SPECIAL MODES the print layout if needed (page 58 Check 43). OK LAYOUT OK CANCEL 2-SIDED ORIGINAL TYPE S WHEN COPYING ON COVERS/INSERTS the [OK] 9 Touch setting screen. 2 To display the layout and print content of the configured print menu, touch the [LAYOUT] key. The position can be changed and settings cancelled if needed. NOTE To cancel print menu... Touch the [CANCEL] key in the screen of step 3. key on the print menu the [OK] key on the special modes 10 Touch screen. About the steps that follow If an automatic document feeder is being used, see pages 4-7 through 4-10. If the document glass is being used, see pages 4-11 through 4-13. Printing in combination with other special functions When a print menu is combined with one of the following special modes, printing will reflect the selected special mode. Special modes Printing operation Margin shift Like the copy image, the printed contents are shifted in accordance with the set margin. Dual page copy The print content is printed on each copy sheet. Pamphlet copy Book copy The print content is printed on each page of the "book". Multi shot Card shot The print content is printed on each copy sheet. Covers/inserts In the print menu settings, specify whether or not the print content is printed on covers and inserts. NOTE When combined with "Erase", "Job build", "Mirror image", "B/W reverse", or "Tab copy", printing takes place normally at the set position on the paper. 5-34 SPECIAL MODES ■ Printing the date on copies The date can be printed on copies. Four selections each are available for the date format and the character that separates the year, month, and day. NOTE The date must be previously set in the system settings. (See page 2-18.) steps 1 and 2 of "Common 1 Follow operation procedure for using the print 5 Select the pages to be printed on. menu" (page 5-33). 2 CANCEL CURRENT SETTING Touch the [DATE] key. OK FIRST PAGE 2010/APR/04 ALL PAGES OK LAYOUT CANCEL DATE CHANGE Select whether to print on only the first page, or all pages. The touched key is highlighted. OK 1/2 DATE STAMP PAGE NUMBERING TEXT 6 Touch the [OK] key. CANCEL 3 Select the date format. CURRENT SETTING OK FIRST PAGE 2010/APR/04 DATE The selected date format is highlighted. YYYY/MM/DD If you selected [YYYY/ MM/DD/YYYY MM/DD], [MM/DD/YYYY], DD/MM/YYYY or [DD/MM/YYYY], you MM DD, YYYY can select the character that separates the year, month, and date. Select [/] (slash), [.] (period), [-] (hyphen), or [ ] (space). 4 Check the date and format. The date to be printed is displayed in FIRST PAGE CURRENT SETTING "CURRENT SETTING" 2010/APR/04 in the selected format. ALL PAGES The date that appears DATE CHANGE is the date set in the machine. If you need to change the date, touch the [DATE CHANGE] key. The following screen appears. CANCEL OK ALL PAGES DATE CHANGE 7 Continue from step 4 of "Common operation procedure for using the print menu" (page 5-33). NOTE To cancel a date print setting... Touch the [CANCEL] key in the date selection screen. (The screen of step 6.) OK DATE CHANGE YEAR MONTH DAY 2010 04 04 Touch the key of the number (year, month, or day) that needs to be changed, and then adjust the number with the or key. When finished, touch the [OK] key. NOTE If you select a non-existent date (for example, Feb. 30), the [OK] key will grey out to prevent entry of the date. 5-35 5 SPECIAL MODES ■ Printing a stamp (reverse text) on copies A message such as "CONFIDENTIAL" can be printed in reverse text on copies. The following 12 messages are available. CONFIDENTIAL PRIORITY PRELIMINARY FINAL FOR YOUR INFO. DO NOT COPY IMPORTANT COPY URGENT DRAFT TOP SECRET PLEASE REPLY You can select from three density levels for the background of the stamp. Two selections are available for the size of the stamp. NOTE The text of the stamp cannot be edited. steps 1 and 2 of "Common 1 Follow operation procedure for using the print 5 Select the desired stamp size. menu" (page 5-33). CANCEL Touch the [STAMP] key. 2 1/2 1 2 3 EXPOSURE OK FIRST PAGE SIZE LARGER OK LAYOUT CANCEL ALL PAGES SMALLER OK 1/2 DATE STAMP PAGE NUMBERING TEXT 6 Select the pages to be printed on. CANCEL 3 Select the stamp that you wish to print. STAMP 1/2 CONFIDENTIAL PRIORITY FOR YOUR INFO. DO NOT COPY URGENT DRAFT 4 The selected stamp is highlighted. If the desired stamp does not appear, change screens with the or key. 1/2 1 2 3 EXPOSURE OK FIRST PAGE SIZE ALL PAGES LARGER SMALLER The density of the background of the stamp can be adjusted. Touch the [EXPOSURE] key to display the following screen. OK FIRST PAGE SIZE ALL PAGES Select whether to print on only the first page, or all pages. The touched key is highlighted. SMALLER 7 Touch the [OK] key. CANCEL 1/2 CANCEL 1 2 3 EXPOSURE LARGER Adjust the exposure as needed. 1/2 "LARGER" is initially selected. To make the stamp smaller, touch the [LARGER/ SMALLER] key. "Smaller" is selected when [SMALLER] is highlighted. 1 2 3 EXPOSURE OK FIRST PAGE SIZE LARGER ALL PAGES SMALLER from step 4 of "Common 8 Continue operation procedure for using the print menu" (page 5-33). EXPOSURE 1 5-36 2 3 Touch the key for a darker background. Touch the key for a lighter background (3 levels). When finished, touch the [OK] key. NOTE To cancel a stamp setting... Touch the [CANCEL] key in the stamp selection screen. (The screen of step 7.) SPECIAL MODES ■ Printing the page number on copies The page number can be printed on copies. One of 6 formats can be selected for the page number. steps 1 and 2 of "Common 1 Follow operation procedure for using the print you need to change the starting or ending 4 Ifnumber of page numbering, the first page printed on, or the print settings for covers/ inserts, touch the [PAGE NUMBER] key. menu" (page 5-33). 2 Touch the [PAGE NUMBERING] key. TOTAL PAGE OK LAYOUT CANCEL AUTO OK MANUAL 1/2 DATE STAMP PAGE NUMBERING TEXT OK CANCEL PAGE NUMBER 5 Touch the [MANUAL] key. 3 Select the page number format. PAGE NUMBER The selected format is highlighted. PAGE NUMBERING PAGE NUMBERING FORMAT FIRST NUMBER AUTO MANUAL 1,2,3.. (1),(2),(3).. -1-,-2-,-3-.. P.1,P.2,P.3.. <1>,<2>,<3>.. 1/5,2/5,3/5.. settings for 6 Enter "LAST NUMBER", "FIRST NUMBER", and "PRINTING STARTS FROM SHEET". "PAGE NUMBER/TOTAL PAGES" will be printed. "AUTO" is initially selected for "TOTAL PAGE", which means that the number of scanned original pages is automatically used. If you need to enter the total pages manually (for example, when a large number of originals are scanned in batches), touch the [MANUAL] key to display the total page entry screen. CANCEL PAGE NUMBERING OK PAGE NUMBERING FORMAT OK TOTAL PAGE (1),(2),(3).. -1-,-2-,-3-.. P.1,P.2,P.3.. <1>,<2>,<3>.. 1/5,2/5,3/5.. PRINTING STARTS FROM 1 If you selected "1/5, 2/5, 3/5", 1,2,3.. LA 1 Touch each key so that it is highlighted, and FIRST NUMBER LAST NUMBER then enter the number AUTO 1 with the numeric keys (1 to 999). PRINTING STARTS FROM SHEET To return a number to 1 its initial value (FIRST NUMBER: 1, LAST NUMBER: AUTO, PRINTING STARTS FROM SHEET: 1), touch the [C] (clear) key while the key of the number is highlighted. If you enter the wrong number, press the [C] (clear) key and enter the correct number. TOTAL PAGE AUTO 30 MANUAL PAGE Enter the total pages (1 to 999) with the numeric keys and touch the [OK] key. NOTES ● When two-sided copying is performed, each side of the paper is counted as a page. If the last page is blank, it will not be included in the total pages. However, if [COUNT BACK COVER] is selected, the last page will be counted. (See step 7.) ● When used in combination with "Dual page copy", "Multi shot", or "Card shot", the number of copied images is the total pages. ● When used in combination with "Pamphlet copy" or "Book copy", the number of pages in the "book" is the total pages. NOTES ● A last number smaller than the "FIRST NUMBER" cannot be set. ● "LAST NUMBER" is initially set to "AUTO", which means that the page number is printed on each page through the final page in accordance with the "FIRST NUMBER" and "PRINTING STARTS FROM SHEET" settings. ● A number less than the total page number is set as the last number, the page number will not be printed on the pages that follow the set number. ● Unlike the first and last page numbers, "PRINTING STARTS FROM SHEET" specifies the sheet of paper (not the page number) from which printing of the page number begins. For example, when "3" is selected for one-sided copying, printing of the page number will start from the 3rd sheet of copy paper (the copy of the 3rd original page). When "3" is selected for two-sided copying, printing of the page number will start from the 3rd sheet of copy paper, which is the copy of the 5th original page. 5-37 5 SPECIAL MODES covers/inserts are added and you 7 When wish to include the covers/inserts in the 9 Touch the [OK] key. page number count, touch the [COVERS/ INSERTS COUNTING] key. OK LAST NUMBER OK AUTO COVERS/INSERTS COUNTING LAST NUMBER AUTO 8 COVERS/INSERTS COUNTING 10 Touch the [OK] key. Select the checkboxes of the items that you wish to include in the page number count and then touch the [OK] key. TOTAL PAGE OK COVERS/INSERTS COUNTING OK CANCEL AUTO COUNT FRONT COVER MANUAL PAGE NUMBER COUNT INSERTS 2 COUNT BACK COVER 1 Front cover image Insert image from step 4 of "Common 11 Continue operation procedure for using the print Back cover image menu" (page 5-33). Items that are selected are reflected in the print image on the right side of the screen. NOTE To cancel a page number setting... Touch the [CANCEL] key in the page number selection screen. (The screen of step 10.) NOTES ● When an item is selected, one inserted sheet (front cover, insert, or back cover) is counted as one page during one-sided copying, and two pages during two-sided copying. However, if one-sided copying is used for the body pages and two-sided copying is used for the inserted sheets, each body page will be counted as one page and each inserted sheet will be counted as two pages. ● Printing never takes place on the front cover and back cover, regardless of whether or not these are counted. ● To print on an insert, the insert must be counted and it must be copied on. NOTES ● Copying in group mode is not possible when page number printing is selected. The mode will automatically switch to sort mode. ● When the page number print position is set to the left or right side and "Pamphlet copy" or "Book copy" is selected, the position of the page numbers will alternate so that they are always on the outside when the pamphlet/book is opened. If a stamp is set in an area with a page numbering setting, the position of the stamp will alternate in the same way. If another item is set in a position that changes, that item will appear in the position that alternates with the page number position. Print menus not related to the alternating print positions will appear in their set positions. [Example] When the page number format "1, 2, 3.." is selected when performing pamphlet copying of 4 pages, the copies will appear as shown below. In this example, the page number is at the bottom of the page and the date is at the top, so the position of the date does not change. Print settings Stamp Page numbering 5-38 Front 2010/APR/4 Date CONFIDENTIAL Text 4 Back 2010/APR/4 2010/APR/4 CONFIDENTIAL Minutes of meeting Minutes of meeting 1 CONFIDENTIAL 2 2010/APR/4 CONFIDENTIAL Minutes of meeting Minutes of meeting 3 SPECIAL MODES Examples of page number printing Page number printing during one-sided copying (5 originals) Setting Value 1st page 2nd page 3rd page 4th page 5th page A 1/5 B 2/5 C 3/5 D 4/5 E 5/5 FIRST NUMBER: 11 11/15 12/15 13/15 14/15 15/15 FIRST NUMBER: 11 LAST NUMBER: 13 11/13 12/13 13/13 1/2 2/2 11/15 12/15 TOTAL PAGE AUTO FIRST NUMBER 1 LAST NUMBER AUTO PRINTING STARTS FROM SHEET 1 Printed contents when settings are changed as follows TOTAL PAGE: 2 TOTAL PAGE: 15 FIRST NUMBER: 11 LAST NUMBER: 13 Not printed Not printed Not printed Not printed Not printed 13/15 PRINTING STARTS FROM SHEET: 3 Not printed Not printed Not printed Not printed 1/3 2/3 3/3 Page number printing during two-sided copying (9 originals) Setting Value TOTAL PAGE 2nd page 3rd page 4th page 5th page Front Back Front Back Front Back Front Back Front A 1/9 B 2/9 C 3/9 D 4/9 E 5/9 6/9 F G 7/9 H 8/9 9/9 Not printed Not printed Not printed Not printed 1/5 2/5 3/5 4/5 5/5 Back AUTO FIRST NUMBER 1 LAST NUMBER AUTO PRINTING STARTS FROM SHEET 1 Printed contents when settings are changed as follows 1st page PRINTING STARTS FROM SHEET: 3 I 5 Not printed Page number printing during one-sided copying of body pages with covers inserted (4 originals) Setting TOTAL PAGE Value 1 LAST NUMBER AUTO COUNT FRONT COVER 2nd page 3rd page 4th page 5th page A 1/4 B 2/4 C 3/4 D 4/4 Not printed Not printed 1/3 2/3 3/3 Not printed (count) 2/5 3/5 4/5 5/5 Not printed (count) 1/4 2/4 3/4 4/4 AUTO FIRST NUMBER PRINTING STARTS FROM SHEET 1st page (Front cover) 1 Not selected PRINTING STARTS FROM SHEET: 2 COUNT FRONT Printed contents when COVER: Selected settings are changed COUNT FRONT as follows COVER: Selected PRINTING STARTS FROM SHEET: 2 When a back cover is inserted, page numbers are counted and printed in the same way. Note that page numbers are never printed on front and back covers. 5-39 SPECIAL MODES Page number printing during two-sided copying of body pages with covers (one-side copying) inserted (9 originals) Setting 1st page (front cover) Value Front TOTAL PAGE 3rd page 4th page 5th page Front Back Front Back Front Back Front Back B 1/8 C 2/8 D 3/8 E 4/8 5/8 F G 6/8 H 7/8 8/8 Not printed Not printed Not printed Not printed 1/4 2/4 3/4 4/4 3/10 4/10 5/10 6/10 7/10 8/10 9/10 10/10 Not printed Not printed 1/6 2/6 3/6 4/6 5/6 6/6 AUTO FIRST NUMBER 1 LAST NUMBER AUTO PRINTING STARTS FROM SHEET 1 COUNT FRONT COVER Not selected Printed contents when settings are changed as follows Back 2nd page A PRINTING STARTS FROM SHEET: 3 Not printed Not printed COUNT FRONT Not printed Not printed COVER: Selected (count) (count) COUNT FRONT COVER: Selected PRINTING STARTS FROM SHEET: 3 Not Not printed printed (count) (count) I When a back cover is inserted, page numbers are counted and printed in the same way. Note that page numbers are never printed on front and back covers. Page number printing during one-sided copying with inserts (4 originals; 5 originals when copying on inserts) 1st page 2nd page 3rd page (insert) 4th page 5th page A 1/4 B 2/4 C D 3/4 E 4/4 PRINTING STARTS FROM SHEET: 3 Not printed Not printed Not printed 1/2 2/2 Setting Value TOTAL PAGE AUTO FIRST NUMBER 1 LAST NUMBER AUTO PRINTING STARTS FROM SHEET 1 COUNT INSERTS Not selected Printed contents when copying on inserts and settings are changed as follows 3/5 (count) 4/5 5/5 COUNT INSERTS: Selected Not printed Not printed 1/3 (count) PRINTING STARTS FROM SHEET: 3 2/3 3/3 Not printed (count) 4/5 5/5 COUNT INSERTS: Selected Not printed Not printed Not printed (count) PRINTING STARTS FROM SHEET: 3 2/3 3/3 COUNT INSERTS: Selected Printed contents when not copying on inserts and settings are changed as follows 1/5 COUNT INSERTS: Selected 2/5 1/5 2/5 When inserts are not copied on, the page number is not printed. Page number printing during two-sided copying of body pages with inserts (one-side copying) (9 originals) Setting TOTAL PAGE Value 2nd page 3rd page (insert) Front Back Front Back Front A 1/8 B 2/8 C 3/8 D 4/8 E 1/10 2/10 3/10 4/10 5/10 Back 4th page 5th page Front Back Front Back 5/8 F G 6/8 H 7/8 8/8 7/10 8/10 9/10 10/10 AUTO FIRST NUMBER 1 LAST NUMBER AUTO PRINTING STARTS FROM SHEET 1st page 1 I COUNT INSERTS Not selected Printed contents when settings are changed as follows 5-40 COUNT INSERTS: Selected Not printed (count) SPECIAL MODES ■ Printing entered text on copies Entered text can be printed on copies. Up to 50 characters can be printed. Up to 30 sequences of frequently used text can be stored. See "Storing text sequences" (page 5-42). NOTE When the machine is connected to a network, the printed text sequences can be stored and deleted in the Web page. For details, see Help in the Web page. steps 1 and 2 of "Common 1 Follow operation procedure for using the print 5 Touch the [OK] key. menu" (page 5-33). 2 Touch the [TEXT] key. 04 05 OK 06 LAYOUT CANCEL OK 1/2 DATE STAMP PAGE NUMBERING TEXT To edit the selected text sequence, touch the 3 DIRECT ENTRY 6 [DIRECT ENTRY] key 1/5 to display the character entry screen. The selected text sequence is entered. For information on entering characters, see page 7-29. When finished, touch the [OK] key to close the character entry screen. CANCEL you wish to use one of the preset text 3 Ifsequences, touch the [RECALL] key. To 6 Select the pages to be printed on. CANCEL directly enter the text, touch the [DIRECT ENTRY] key. CANCEL TEXT OK FIRST PAGE ALL PAGES OK FIRST PAGE OK Select whether to print on only the first page, or all pages. The touched key is highlighted. DIRECT ENTRY PRE-SET ALL PAGES RECALL STORE/DELETE DIRECT ENTRY If you touch the [DIRECT ENTRY] key, a character entry screen will appear. For information on entering characters, see page 7-29. When finished, click the [OK] key to close the character entry screen. (Go to step 6.) stored text sequences will appear as 4 The keys. Touch the key of the desired text sequence. CANCEL TEXT 3 RECALL No.01 TARO YAMADA No.04 No.02 Meeting No.05 No.03 No.06 6 OK DIRECT ENTRY 7 Touch the [OK] key. CANCEL OK FIRST PAGE ALL PAGES DIRECT ENTRY from step 4 of "Common 8 Continue operation procedure for using the print menu" (page 5-33). 1/5 The selected text sequence key is highlighted. If the desired text sequence key does not appear, change screens with the or key. The display is initially set to show 6 keys per screen. This can be changed to 3 keys per screen by touching the [3 6] key. When 3 keys are displayed, the entire text sequence will appear in each key. (When 6 keys are displayed, up to 22 characters appear in each key.) NOTE To cancel a text setting... Touch the [CANCEL] key in the text print screen. (The screen of step 7.) 5-41 5 SPECIAL MODES Storing text sequences Editing and deleting stored text steps 1 and 2 of "Common 1 Follow operation procedure for using the print steps 1 and 2 of "Common 1 Follow operation procedure for using the print menu" (page 5-33). menu" (page 5-33). 2 Touch the [TEXT] key. 2 Touch the [TEXT] key. OK LAYOUT CANCEL OK LAYOUT OK CANCEL OK 1/2 1/2 DATE STAMP DATE STAMP PAGE NUMBERING TEXT PAGE NUMBERING TEXT 3 Touch the [STORE/DELETE] key. 3 Touch the [STORE/DELETE] key. PRE-SET RECALL PRE-SET STORE/DELETE RECALL a key 4 Touch programmed (a that has not been key in which No. xx the text key that you wish to edit or 4 Touch delete. appears). TEXT 3 STORE/DELETE TEXT 3 STORE/DELETE No.01 TARO YAMADA No.04 No.02 Meeting No.05 No.03 No.06 6 BACK 1/5 When touched, the character entry screen appears. Enter the text (max. 50 characters). For information on entering characters, see page 7-29. When finished, touch the [OK] key to close the character entry screen. If no free keys appear, change screens with the or key. 6 04 Minutes of meeting No.04 Minutes of meeting No.02 Meeting No.05 No.03 No.06 1/5 05 06 6 Touch the [BACK] key. 3 6 04 Minutes of meeting 05 06 5-42 BACK 1/5 When the [AMEND] key is touched, the character A TEXT HAS BEEN ALREADY STORED TO LOCATION. CHANGE THE TEXT? entry screen appears. The selected text CANCEL DELETE AMEND sequence is entered. For No.06 information on entering characters, see page 729. When finished, touch the [OK] key to close the character entry screen. If you touch the [DELETE] key, the text will be deleted and you will return to the screen of step 4. To cancel editing or deletion, touch the [CANCEL] key. The entered text is stored. BACK 6 No.01 TARO YAMADA edit the text, touch the [AMEND] key. To 5 To delete the text, touch the [DELETE] key. 5 Touch the [BACK] key. 3 STORE/DELETE BACK 1/5 SPECIAL MODES ■ Checking and changing the print layout You can check the print layout after the print items have been selected. If needed you can change the print position or delete print content. the [LAYOUT] key on the print menu 1 Touch screen. 4 Touch the key of the new position. The selected key is highlighted and the print position changes to the new position. OK LAYOUT DATE STAMP PAGE NUMBERING TEXT SELECTED ITEM. OK CANCEL 1/ the key in which you wish to change 2 Touch the print position or delete print content. The keys indicating the print position appear as follows depending on the state of the setting: Print position without any set print menus. OK LAYOUT TARO YAMADA CONFIDENTIAL Currently set print position. DO NOT COPY Print position with another competing print menu set. (When moving a stamp, this indicates that another stamp has been set. When moving a print menu other than a stamp, this indicates that the date, page number, or text has been set.) 1,2,3.. NOTE Up to 14 characters of the print text appears in the key. 3 To change the print position, touch the [MOVE] key. To delete print content, touch the [DELETE] key. DO YOU WANT TO MOVE OR DELETE THE SELECTED ITEM? CANCEL DELETE MOVE 1,2,3.. If you touched the [MOVE] key, the new position selection screen appears. If you touched the [DELETE] key, the print content is deleted. (Go to step 6.) NOTE If you wish to swap the contents of two positions, temporarily move the content of one position to an unused position and then complete the swap. 5 Touch the [OK] key. If you attempt to move print content to a position that already has print content set, a message will appear asking you if you wish to overwrite the previously set content. To overwrite the content, touch the [YES] key. To cancel the move and return to the condition before the [OK] key was touched, touch the [NO] key. OK 6 Touch the [OK] key. OK CONFIDENTIAL DO NOT COPY 1,2,3.. 5-43 5 STORING, USING AND DELETING JOB PROGRAMS The steps of up to 10 copy jobs can be stored as job programs. Job programs can be called up with ease, and are retained even when the power is turned off. By storing frequently used copy settings in a job program, you can eliminate the bother of selecting the settings each time you use them for a copy job. ●If any settings related to the steps of a job program are changed in the administrator settings after the job program is stored, the steps related to the changed settings will not be included when the job program is called up. ●To exit the job programs mode, press the [CA] (clear all) key on the operation panel or touch the [EXIT] key on the touch panel. Storing a job program 1 Press the [#/P] key. 5 Touch the [OK] key. NCEL OK AUTO ORIGINAL LOGOUT The selected settings will be stored in the number key selected in step 3. AUTO 2 Touch the [STORE/DELETE] key. M NUMBER. RECALL STORE/DELETE the number key ([1] to [10]) in which 3 Touch you wish to stored the job program. Number keys in which job programs are already stored are highlighted. PROGRAMS ESS PROGRAM NUMBER. RECALL STORE/ the copy settings that you wish to 4 Select store in the job program. The number of copies cannot be stored. TO STORE, MAKE SELECTIONS AND PRESS [OK], TO DELETE, PRESS [CANCEL]. SPECIAL MODES 2-SIDED COPY OUTPUT 1. 2. A4 3. 4. 5-44 B5 B4 A3 ■ If a number key is selected in step 3 that has already been programmed. A setting confirmation screen will appear. To replace the existing program with the new program, touch the [STORE] key and continue from step 4. If you do not wish to replace the existing program, touch the [CANCEL] key to return to the screen of step 3 and select a different number key. NOTE If overwriting of programmed copy settings has been prohibited in the administrator settings, it will not be possible to store or delete a job program. (See page 17 of the administrator settings guide.) STORING, USING AND DELETING JOB PROGRAMS Calling up a job program 1 Press the [#/P] key. the number of copies if needed and 3 Set then press the [START] key. Copying will begin using the settings of the job program. LOGOUT the number key of the desired job 2 Touch program. The screen automatically closes and the job program is called up. A number key that does not have a job program cannot be selected. JOB PROGRAMS PRESS PROGRAM NUMBER. RECALL Deleting a stored job program 1 Press the [#/P] key. 5 4 Touch the [DELETE] key. The selected program is deleted and you return to the screen of step 3. To return to the screen of CANCEL DELETE STORE RECALL STORE/DELETE step 3 without deleting the job program, touch the [CANCEL] key. In both cases, touch the [EXIT] key on the screen displayed in the screen of step 3 to exit the job program mode. A JOB PROGRAM HAS BEEN ALREADY STORED IN THIS LOCATION. LOGOUT 2 Touch the [STORE/DELETE] key. M NUMBER. NOTE RECALL If overwriting of programmed copy settings has been prohibited in the administrator settings, it will not be possible to store or delete a job program. (See page 17 of the administrator settings guide.) STORE/DELETE a storage register number of the 3 Select program to be deleted. EXIT STORE/DELETE If a number key for which no job program has been stored is selected, the screen will change to the screen of step 4 on the previous page for storing a job program. 5-45 INTERRUPTING A COPY RUN The copy of the original scanned in interrupt mode is output before the remainder of the interrupted copy job. 1 Touch the [INTERRUPT] key. INTERRUPT AUTO ORIGINA 23 A4 AUTO EXPOSUR AUTO A4 0 CANCEL ORIGINAL A4 AUTO EXPOSURE AUTO A4 PAPER SELECT 100% COPY RATIO If interrupt copying is possible during a copy run, the [INTERRUPT] key will appear. (If the key does not appear, interrupt copying is not possible.) When the [INTERRUPT] key is touched in step 1, the [INTERRUPT] key will be replaced by the [CANCEL] key as shown in the illustration. the original for the interrupt copy job 2 Place in the document feeder or on the document glass (page 4-3). the exposure mode, paper size, 3 Select number of copies, and any other copy settings as needed, and then press the [START] key. To cancel an interrupt copy job while the interrupt original is being scanned or while you are selecting copy settings, touch the [CANCEL] key. NOTES ● If you touch the [INTERRUPT] key when auditing mode is enabled, the display will prompt you to enter your account number. Enter your account number with the numeric keys. The copies you make will be added to the count of the entered account number. ● If a copy is being printed when the [INTERRUPT] key is pressed, interrupt mode will begin after the copy is finished. ● If the copy run to be interrupted is using paper from the bypass tray, the paper size and type of the bypass tray cannot be changed for use by the interrupt job. ● If the document glass is used for an interrupt copy job, two-sided copying, sort copying, and staple sort copying cannot be selected. If any of these functions are necessary, use the document feeder. 5-46 previous copy job automatically 4 The resumes after the interrupt job finishes. CHAPTER 6 MACHINE MAINTENANCE (FOR COPYING) This chapter explains procedures for cleaning the machine, and troubleshooting. Page USER MAINTENANCE ........................................................................... 6-2 ● Cleaning the document glass and the automatic document feeder ....... 6-2 TROUBLESHOOTING ............................................................................ 6-3 6-1 USER MAINTENANCE To ensure good service from this product over a long period of time, it is recommended that the following maintenance procedures be performed on a regular basis. CAUTION Do not use flammable spray to clean the machine. If gas from the spray comes in contact with hot electrical components or the fusing unit inside the machine, fire or electrical shock may result. NOTE When cleaning, do not use thinner, benzene, or similar volatile cleaning agents. Cleaning the document glass and the automatic document feeder If the document glass, document cover or automatic document scanning unit have dirty spots, these spots will form lines in scanned images. These will show up as defects when the images are printed. Always keep these parts clean. Wipe with a clean, soft cloth. If necessary, moisten the cloth with water or a small amount of neutral detergent. When finished, wipe dry with a clean cloth. scanning unit ( and If black or white stripes appear on printed images of originals that were fed through the automatic document feeder, wipe the long narrow glasses in the in the illustration). Example of dirty print image Black stripes 6-2 White stripes TROUBLESHOOTING Check the following troubleshooting list before requesting service as many problems can be fixed by the user. If you are unable to solve the problem by checking the list, turn off the main power switch and the power switch, and unplug the power cord. Problems related to the copy function are described below. For problems related to general use of the machine, see page 2-32. Problem Check Solution Machine does not operate. Is the [START] key indicator off? This indicates that the machine is warming up (warming up lasts no more than 120 seconds after the power switch is turned on). Copying is not possible during this time. Wait until the [START] key light illuminates. Copies are too dark or too light. Is the original image too dark or too light? Select an appropriate exposure mode for the original being copied and adjust the copy exposure. (See page 4-14.) Is the exposure mode set to "AUTO"? The exposure level for "AUTO" can be adjusted using "Exposure adjustment" in the administrator settings. Contact your administrator. (See page 16 of the administrator settings guide.) An appropriate exposure mode for the original has not been selected. Change the exposure mode to "AUTO" or manually select an appropriate resolution setting. (See page 4-14.) Text is not clear on a copy. An appropriate exposure mode for the original has not been selected. Change the exposure mode to "TEXT". (See page 4-14.) Smudges appear on copies. Document glass or document cover dirty? Clean regularly. (See page 6-2.) Black lines appear on copies when the Clean the original scanning area. (See page automatic document feeding function is 6-2.) used. Original smudged or blotchy? Use a clean original. Is the auto paper select or auto image function selected? Rotation copy functions only if the machine is either in the auto paper select mode or in the auto image mode. (See page 4-15.) Part of original image is not copied. Is the original positioned correctly? Set the original properly. (See page 4-3.) Is the copy ratio proper for the original and paper sizes? Use the auto image function to select the appropriate copy ratio based on the original and copy sizes. (See page 4-15.) Blank copies Is the original placed correctly? When using the document glass, place the original face down. When using the automatic document feeder, place original face up. (See page 4-3.) Is the order of originals correct? When using the document glass, place the originals from the first page one sheet at a time. When using the automatic document feeder, place the originals with the first page up. Image cannot rotated. Order of incorrect be copies Job cancellation needed Is a message requesting cancellation of job Press the [CA] key to cancel the current job. displayed? 6-3 6 CHAPTER 7 DOCUMENT FILING FUNCTION Page OVERVIEW ............................................................................................. 7-2 ● Document filing function.................................................................. 7-2 TO USE THE DOCUMENT FILING FUNCTION..................................... 7-4 ● A look at the operation panel .......................................................... 7-4 ● Saving files...................................................................................... 7-4 ● Main screen of document filing ....................................................... 7-5 ● Document filing icons ...................................................................... 7-5 SAVING A DOCUMENT IMAGE FILE .................................................... 7-6 ● Quick File ........................................................................................ 7-6 ● Filing................................................................................................ 7-7 ● Print jobs ......................................................................................... 7-9 ● Scan Save ....................................................................................... 7-10 CALLING UP AND USING A FILE.......................................................... 7-13 ● Searching for and calling up a saved file......................................... 7-13 ● Calling up and using a saved file..................................................... 7-15 SYSTEM SETTINGS .............................................................................. 7-24 ● Creating, editing, and deleting user names and folders.................. 7-24 ENTERING CHARACTERS.................................................................... 7-29 TROUBLESHOOTING ............................................................................ 7-31 7-1 OVERVIEW Document filing function The document filing function allows you to save a document image in the machine's hard disk as a data file. The image can be called up and printed or transmitted as needed. The scanned document image is saved when printing or transmitting a document in copy mode, printer mode, or image send mode ("QUICK FILE" or "FILE"). A document can also be scanned and saved without being printed, copied, or transmitted ("scan save"). To allow you to search for the file and call it up, names (user name, file name, etc.) can be assigned to the file (except when using Quick File). ■ Data flow Printing in copy mode (Quick File saving, page 7-6) Machine hard disk Printing from a computer (printer data, page 7-9) Transmission in fax/image send mode (filing, page 7-7) Print Save to machine's hard disk HDD Call up a saved file to reuse it. Send (facsimile or image send function must be required) and Scanning a document only (scan save, page 7-10) Machine hard disk QUICK FILE FOLDER Data is saved by job MAIN FOLDER A user name and file name is specified for each saved job File 1 File 1 File 2 File 2 A password can be set CUSTOM FOLDER A user name and file name can be specified for each file and the file saved to a folder with any desired name assigned. Folder 1 A password can be set Folder 2 Folder 3 File 1 File 2 ●A stored file can be moved to a different folder under certain conditions (page 7-22). 7-2 A password can be set OVERVIEW ■ Quick File folder When [QUICK FILE FOLDER] is selected in the main screen of any of the modes, the file is saved in this folder. Up to 1000 files can be saved in the Quick File folder. All files in the Quick File Folder can be deleted using the administrator settings. If you have a file that you do not want deleted, set the file attribute to [PROTECT] (up to 500 files can be protected). (See [Property change] on page 7-21) The following user and file names are automatically assigned (the names cannot be selected): User name : User unknown File name (example) : COPY_04042010_113050AM (job mode and month, day, year, hour, minute, second, AM/ PM of save). (In the example, the file was saved on 4/4/2010 at 11:30 and 50 sec in copy mode.) When saved, jobs are classified by mode. A saved job can be called up from the COMPLETE job status screen. ■ Main folder When saving a file, a previously stored user name (see [SYSTEM SETTINGS] on page 7-24) can be specified and any file name can be assigned. A password can also be set for a saved file ([CONFIDENTIAL] save). (See [Property change] on page 7-21.) If a user name and file name are not selected, a name in the same format as Quick File is automatically assigned. ■ Custom folder Up to 500 folders (named as desired) can be created in this folder. When saving a file in one of these folders, a previously stored user name (see [SYSTEM SETTINGS] on page 7-24) can be specified and any file name can be assigned. A password can be set for a file saved in one of these folders. ■ Attributes of saved files The protect setting can be selected for files saved with the document filing function. This prevents a file from being moved or automatically or manually deleted. Three attributes are available for saved files: [SHARING], [PROTECT], and [CONFIDENTIAL]. When saved with the [SHARING] attribute, a file is not protected. When saved with the [PROTECT] or [CONFIDENTIAL] attribute, a file is protected. Files saved to the Quick File folder are all [SHARING]. When saving a file to the main folder or a custom folder, [SHARING] or [CONFIDENTIAL] can be selected. ● A [SHARING] file can be changed to a [PROTECT] or [CONFIDENTIAL] file using [Property change] (page 7-21). ● A password is set for a [CONFIDENTIAL] file to protect it. (The password must be entered to call up the file.) ● A password cannot be set for a [PROTECT] file, however, as long as the file is not changed to [SHARING] with [PROPERTY CHANGE], the file will be protected. CAUTION ● Documents saved with [QUICK FILE] are shared files that can be called up by anyone and printed or transmitted. For this reason, do not use Quick File for sensitive documents or documents that you do not want to be reused by others. ● When saving a document with [FILE], set the attribute to [CONFIDENTIAL] and set a password to prevent others from reusing the document. ● Even when a file is saved with the [CONFIDENTIAL] attribute, the attribute can be changed afterward to [SHARING] using [Property change] (page 7-21). For this reason, do not save sensitive documents or documents that you do not want to be reused by others. ● Except in cases provided for by law, SHARP Corporation bears no responsibility for any damages that result from the leaking of sensitive information due to 1) manipulation by a third party of any data saved using the Quick File function or filing function, or 2) incorrect operation of the Quick File function or filing function by the operator that saves the data. 7-3 7 TO USE THE DOCUMENT FILING FUNCTION A look at the operation panel DOCUMENT FILING IMAGE SEND PRINT READY DATA LINE DATA COPY SYSTEM JOB STATUS SETTINGS 1 Touch panel (see the next page) This displays messages and keys. Keys can be touched to select and enter settings. When a key is touched, a beep will sound and the key will be highlighted to indicate that it is selected. When a key cannot be selected in a screen, it will be greyed out. If touched, a warning beep will sound to alert you that it cannot be selected. 2 4 Numeric keys Use these keys to enter a password or a numeric value for a setting. 5 [C] key (Clear key) Use this key if you make a mistake when entering a password or numeric setting. This key is also used to cancel scanning of a document. Mode select keys Use this key to select the mode. 3 LOGOUT 6 Use this key to cancel a setting procedure and return to the main screen. The key is also used to cancel a special function. [DOCUMENT FILING] key Touch this key to display the main screen of document filing mode. [CA] key (Clear all key) 7 [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key Use this key to store, edit or delete a user name or custom folder. Saving files To save files to the main folder or custom folders, a user name must be previously stored. To create a folder in the custom folder, the folder name must be stored. These settings are configured in the system settings. Follow the procedures explained in "Programming a user name", "Editing and deleting a user name", "Creating a custom folder", and "Editing/deleting a custom folder" on pages 7-25 to 7-28. 7-4 TO USE THE DOCUMENT FILING FUNCTION Main screen of document filing To display the main screen of document filing, press the [DOCUMENT FILING] key when the touch panel shows the copy mode screen, image send mode, or the job status screen. The main screen shows messages, keys, and items that can be selected for document filing. Document filing icons Main icon Icon of confidential file or folder Icon of protected file Meaning Folder Copy job file FILE STORE SCAN TO HDD Print job file (including direct print jobs) FILE RETRIEVE FILE FOLDER QUICK FILE FOLDER Fax transmission job file SEARCH GLOBAL ACCESS HDD STATUS 1 Message display Displays messages. 2 [SCAN TO HDD] key Touch to select scan save. Scan save is used to save the image file of a scanned document in the main folder or a custom folder without printing or transmitting the document. 3 4 PC-FAX transmission job file Internet fax transmission job file PC-Internet fax transmission job file [FILE FOLDER] key Touch to call up a file from the main folder or the custom folder. When the key is touched, the files in the main folder or the folders in the custom folder appear. Scan save file E-mail transmission job file [QUICK FILE FOLDER] key Touch to call up a file from the Quick File folder. When the key is touched, the files in the Quick File folder appear. 5 [SEARCH] key Touch to search for a file by user name, file name, or folder name. 6 [HDD STATUS] key Touch to check the use of the machine's hard disk. FTP transmission job file Desktop transmission job file Network Folder transmission job file The following icons may appear added to a main icon or alone. Icon Meaning Confidential file or folder Protected file NOTE When the file of a job that was saved using scan save is printed in job settings, the icon of the job is highlighted. 7-5 7 SAVING A DOCUMENT IMAGE FILE Quick File When printing or transmitting a document in copy mode, printer mode, or fax/image transmission mode,"QUICK FILE" can be selected to save an image of the document to the Quick File folder. The image can be called up at a later time, allowing you to print or transmit the document without having to locate the original. NOTE As an example, the procedure for saving a document to the Quick File folder while copying using the automatic document feeding function is explained below. the original in the document feeder 1 Place and select resolution and exposure settings. AUTO ORIGINAL AUTO EXPOSURE AUTO 2 A4 See steps 1 to 8 of "Making copies with the automatic document feeding function" on pages 4-7 to 4-8 and "ADJUSTING THE EXPOSURE" on page 414. Touch the [QUICK FILE] key in the main screen. The [QUICK FILE] key will be highlighted to FILE indicate that the function is selected. QUICK FILE If the [FILE] key is greyed out, only the [QUICK FILE] key can be selected. When you touch the [QUICK FILE] key, a message asking you to confirm the save will appear. Touch the [OK] key in the message screen and go to the next step. If you wish to cancel the save, touch the [QUICK FILE] key after touching the [OK] key so that the [QUICK FILE] key is no longer highlighted. the [START] key on the operation 3 Press panel. To prevent accidental saving of the document, the warning "THE SCANNED DATA IS STORED IN THE QUICK FILE FOLDER." appears for 6 seconds after the [START] key is pressed. When copying begins, the image is saved. 7-6 saved image can be called up from the 4 The Quick File folder or the job status screen. ●To call the image up from the Quick File folder, see "Calling up and using a saved file" on page 7-15. ●To call the job up from the finished job status screen, see "Calling up and manipulating a file from the job status screen" on page 7-23. following operations can be 5 The performed on the image that was called up in step 4. ●Print the image (page 7-17) ●Transmit the image (page 7-20) ●Change the attribute (page 7-21) ●Move the image (page 7-22) ●Delete the image (page 7-22) ●Check details on the image (page 7-22) SAVING A DOCUMENT IMAGE FILE Filing When printing or transmitting a document in copy mode, printer mode, or image send mode, "FILE" can be selected to save an image of the document to the main folder or a previously created custom folder. The image can be called up at a later time, allowing you to print or transmit the document without having to locate the original. NOTE As an example, the procedure for using the filing function while copying using the automatic document feeding function is explained below. the original in the document feeder 1 Place and select resolution and exposure settings. AUTO ORIGINAL See steps 1 to 8 of "Making copies with the automatic document feeding function" on pages 4-7 to 4-8 and "ADJUSTING THE EXPOSURE" on page 414. AUTO EXPOSURE A4 AUTO 5 Touch the [OK] key. The touched user name is selected and you return to the screen of step 3. The selected user name appears. NOTE If you do not select a user name, the following name is automatically selected: Example : User unknown 6 Touch the [FILE NAME] key. USER NAME 2 Touch the [FILE] key in the main screen. FILE NAME An information screen appears. FILE entry STORED TO: A character entry screen appears. Enter a file COPY name (maximum of 30 characters). (See page MAI 7-29 to enter characters.) QUICK FILE 3 Touch the [USER NAME] key. CONFIDENTIAL 7 Touch the [STORED TO:] key. USER NAME FILE NAME COPY STORED TO: MAI Suzuki Sasaki Hasegawa Nakata Ono Yamada ABCD EFGHI 7 USER NAME the desired user name in the list of 4 Touch user names that appears. ALL USERS NOTE If you do not enter a file name, a file name in the following format is automatically assigned: Auto generated file name : Month, day, year, hour, minute, second, AM/PM (Example : COPY_04042010_113050AM) FILE NAME COPY STORED TO: MAIN 1/1 the desired folder name in the list of 8 Touch folder names that appears JKLMN OPQRST UVWXYZ User names must be previously stored ("Programming a user name" on page 7-25). CUSTOM FOLDER 1 CUSTOM FOLDER 2 CUSTOM FOLDER 3 CUSTOM FOLDER 4 CUSTOM FOLDER 5 CUSTOM FOLDER 6 CUSTOM FOLDER 7 CUSTOM FOLDER 8 ALL FOLDERS ABCD EFGHI JKLMN OPQRS 1/2 UVWXY Folder names must be previously stored. ("Creating a custom folder" on page 7-27). If a password has been set for the folder, a password entry screen will appear. Enter the 5-digit password for the folder. 7-7 SAVING A DOCUMENT IMAGE FILE 9 Touch the [OK] key. FOLDER will return to the screen of step 4. The 14 You set password is displayed with " ". The touched folder is selected and you return to the screen of step 5. The selected folder name is displayed. OK 2/2 CANCEL OK PASSWORD XYYY needed, select the [CONFIDENTIAL] 10 Ifcheckbox (only in copy mode). When this is selected, the file is stored with the attribute [CONFIDENTIAL]. CONFIDENTIAL To call up the file, the password that will be set in USER NAME the following steps must be entered. FILE NAME ●If you selected the [CONFIDENTIAL] checkbox, touch the [PASSWORD] key and enter a password. ●If you did not select the [CONFIDENTIAL] checkbox, go to step 16. The file will be saved as a [SHARING] file. FILE INFORMATION The password screen appears. entry PASSWORD XYYY a 5-digit password with the numeric 12 Enter keys. CANCEL ENTER PASSWORD VIA THE 10-KEY PAD. 13 Touch the [OK] key. 0 CANCEL 10-KEY PAD. 7-8 OK You will return to the main screen. the [START] key on the operation 16 Press panel. When copying begins, the image is saved. saved image can be called up using 17 The the file name, folder name, or user name, or from the filing folder. 11 Touch the [PASSWORD] key. CAN 15 Touch the [OK] key. As each digit is entered, "-" changes to " ". ●To call up the image by entering the file name, folder name, or user name, see "Searching for and calling up a saved file" on page 7-13. ●To call up the image from the filing folder, see "Calling up and using a saved file" on page 715. following operations can be 18 The performed on the image that was called up: ●Print the image (page 7-17) ●Transmit the image (page 7-20) ●Change the attribute (page 7-21) ●Move the image (page 7-22) ●Delete the image (page 7-22) ●Check details on the image (page 7-22) SAVING A DOCUMENT IMAGE FILE Print jobs Print jobs sent to the machine using the machine's printer driver can be saved in the main folder or a previously created custom folder when printed. The saved print data can be called up and printed or transmitted without having to open the original file on your computer. This section gives an overview of this function and explains the procedure for printing from the operation panel of the machine. For the procedures that are performed at your computer when initiating printing such as selecting the save location and file attribute, see the printer driver Help file. ■ Using a print job file (printing, deleting, transmitting, etc.) 1 Press the [DOCUMENT FILING] key on the operation panel. DOCUMENT FILING PRINT READY DATA the key of the folder that contains 3 Touch the desired file. CUSTOM FOLDER 1 CUSTO CUSTOM FOLDER 3 CUSTO CUSTOM FOLDER 5 CUSTO CUSTOM FOLDER 7 CUSTO ALL FOLDERS If a password is set for the selected folder, a password entry screen will appear. Enter the 5digit password with the numeric keys. MAIN FOLDER CUSTOM FOLDER ABCD EFGHI JKLMN OPQRS the printer icon ( ) tab and then 4 Touch touch the key of the desired file. CUSTOM FOLDER MAIN FOLDER FILE NAME SEARCH USER NAME IMAGE SEND COPY SYSTEM JOB STATUS SETTINGS 2 Touch the [FILE FOLDER] key or the [QUICK FILE FOLDER] key depending on where the file is saved. FILE RETRIEVE FILE FOLDER QUICK FILE FOLDER 1 1/1 1 Basic Yamada 2003/10/01 presentation Sato 2003/10/01 Product Akata 2003/10/01 PRINTS BATCH P. The following screen appears if the [QUICK FILE FOLDER] key is touched in step 2. SEARCH QUICK FILE FOLDER LINE DATA BACK DATE FILE NAME USER NAME BACK DATE 1 1 Tanaka7890123456 User unknown 2003/10/01 Suzuki7890123456 User unknown 2003/10/01 PRINTS BATCH P. Touch the key of the file that you wish to call up. A menu screen will appear. If a password is set for the file, a password entry screen will appear. Enter the 5-digit password with the numeric keys. the key of the operation that you 5 Touch wish to perform. SEARCH (1) HDD STATUS (2) (3) CANCEL JOB SETTINGS ●Touch the [FILE FOLDER] key if the file is saved in the main folder or the custom folder. Touch the [QUICK FILE FOLDER] key if the file is saved in the Quick File folder. If you touched the [FILE FOLDER] key, the files in the main folder or the folders in the custom folder appear. If you open the wrong folder, touch the [MAIN FOLDER] key or the [CUSTOM FOLDER] key and open the correct folder. ●If the desired file is saved in the main folder, go to step 4. If the desired file is saved in a custom folder, go to step 3. ●If you touched the [QUICK FILE FOLDER] key, the files in the Quick File folder appear. Go to step 4. Basic specifications Yamada Taro A4 SELECT THE JOB. PRINT SEND PROPERTY CHANGE MOVE DELETE DETAIL (4) (5) (6) (1) [PRINT] key (see page 7-17) (2) [SEND] key (see page 7-20) (3) [PROPERTY CHANGE] key (see page 7-21) (4) [MOVE] key (see page 7-22) (5) [DELETE] key (see page 7-22) (6) [DETAIL] key (see page 7-22) The setting screen of the selected operation appears. See the indicated page. 7-9 7 SAVING A DOCUMENT IMAGE FILE Scan Save Scan save is used to save a scanned document image in the main folder or the custom folder without copying or transmitting it. the [DOCUMENT FILING] key on the 1 Press operation panel. any of the following steps 7 to 16 6 Perform as needed. When finished, go to step 17 on page 7-11. PRINT READY DATA DOCUMENT FILING ●To set the original size, perform steps 7 to 10. ●To set the resolution, perform steps 11 to 13 on page 7-11. ●To select the exposure, perform steps 14 to 16 on page 7-11. ●If you no not wish to select any of the above settings, go to step 17 on page 7-11. LINE DATA IMAGE SEND COPY SYSTEM JOB STATUS SETTINGS 2 Touch the [SCAN TO HDD] key. 7 Touch the [ORIGINAL] key. FILE STORE SCAN TO HDD 300x300dpi RESOLUTION AUTO ORIGINAL 3 Touch the [SPECIAL MODES] key. SPECIAL MODES FILE INFORMATION Select any special functions that you wish to use (otherwise skip this step). When the [SPECIAL MODES] key is touched, the special modes selection screen appears. (See "Using special functions for scan save" on page 7-12.) NOTE For explanations of the special functions, see page 7-12 and chapter 5. set the original size, see "Manually 8 To setting the scanning size" on page 4-5. the original is two-sided, touch the [29 IfSIDED BOOKLET] key or the [2-SIDED TABLET] key depending on where the pages are bound. SCAN SIZE AUTO 2-SIDED BOOKLET 100% STORE SIZ AUTO 2-SIDED TABLET 4 Touch the [FILE INFORMATION] key. SPECIAL MODES 10 Touch the [OK] key. FILE INFORMATION You will return to the screen of step 7. screens for selecting the user name, file 5 The name, folder, and attribute appear. Configure the settings as explained in step 3 to step 15 on pages 7-7 to 7-8. When step 15 is completed, you will return to the main screen of document filing. FILE STORE FILE RETRIEVE SCAN TO HDD FILE FOLDER QUICK FILE FOLDER SEARCH GLOBAL ACCESS 7-10 HDD STATUS STORE SIZE AUTO OK IDED NOTE If the original pages are bound at the side, the document is a "booklet". If the original pages are bound at the top, the document is a "tablet". SAVING A DOCUMENT IMAGE FILE 11 Touch the [RESOLUTION] key. 16 Touch the [OK] key. You will return to the screen of step 14. AUTO EXPOSURE OK 300x300dpi RESOLUTION MANUAL AUTO ORIGINAL 12 Touch the key of the desired resolution. the original and touch the [START] 17 Place key. PRESS [START] TO SCAN ORIGINAL. SCAN TO HDD OK 200x200dpi AUTO EXPOSURE 300x300dpi RESOLUTION 400x400dpi AUTO ORIGINAL 600x600dpi HALF TONE Select one of four resolution levels as appropriate for the original. The selected resolution key is highlighted. 13 Touch the [OK] key. OK You will return to the screen of step 11. NOTE This completes the scan save procedure. Follow the steps below when you wish to call up the image and print or transmit it. HALF TONE 14 Touch the [EXPOSURE] key. AUTO EXPOSURE AUTO ORIGINAL 15 Select [AUTO] or [MANUAL]. AUTO saved image can be called up using 18 The the file name, folder name, or user name, or from the filing folder. 300x300dpi RESOLUTION AUTO [Placing the original] ●For information on placing the original, see "NORMAL COPYING" in chapter 4. ●If you selected the "Card Shot" special function, the document glass must be used. ●If you selected job build mode, the automatic document feeding function must be used. Scanning begins. If you are using the document glass, touch the [READ-END] key after all pages have been scanned. MANUAL MANUAL To have the exposure adjusted automatically, select [AUTO]. If you selected [MANUAL], touch the or key to adjust the exposure. (For a darker image, touch the key. For a lighter image, touch the key.) ●To call up the image by entering the file name, folder name, or user name, see "Searching for and calling up a saved file" on page 7-13. ●To call up the image from the filing folder, see "Calling up and using a saved file" on page 715. following operations can be 19 The performed on the image that was called up in step 18: ●Print the image (page 7-17) ●Transmit the image (page 7-20) ●Change the attribute ((page 7-21) ●Move the image (page 7-22) ●Delete the image (page 7-22) ●Check details on the image (page 7-22) 7-11 7 SAVING A DOCUMENT IMAGE FILE ■ Using special functions for scan save Touch the [SPECIAL MODES] key in the main scan save screen to display the special modes screen. The functions below can be selected in this screen. READY TO SCAN TO HDD. PRESS [START] TO SCAN ORIGINAL. Touch the [SPECIAL MODES] key in the main screen. SCAN TO HDD BACK AUTO EXPOSURE 300x300dpi RESOLUTION SPECIAL MODES AUTO ORIGINAL FILE INFORMATION [READY TO SCAN TO HDD. PRESS [START] TO SCAN ORIGINAL. OK SPECIAL MODES ERASE JOB BUILD 1 [ERASE] key (see page 5-4) DUAL PAGE SCAN [DUAL PAGE SCAN] key (see page 5-5) (Equivalent to Dual page copy in copy mode) This function is used to save the opened pages of a book in order one page at a time (left page then right page). 3 [2in1] key (see page 5-24) (When the fax or image send function is installed, this corresponds to the 2in1 function explained in the fax and network scanner manuals. This also corresponds to the "Multishot" function in copy mode, however, only "2in1" is possible for scan save. ) This function reduces two original pages and arranges the images on a single page in a uniform layout. 7-12 2in1 CARD SHOT 4 Use this function to erase shadows that can appear around the edges of the image when books and other thick originals are scanned. 2 1 2 [JOB BUILD] key (see page 5-8) When you have more pages than can be placed in the document feeder at once, this function allows you to scan the pages in sets. 5 [CARD SHOT] key (see page 5-29) This function allows you to save the front and back side of a card on a single page (instead of saving each side as a separate file). CALLING UP AND USING A FILE Searching for and calling up a saved file When calling up a file, you can enter the file name, folder name, or user name to quickly search for the file. To search for a file, touch the [SEARCH] key in the main screen of document filing mode or in a screen that shows folders or files in a folder. A data search screen will appear. ■ Procedure for searching for a file the [SEARCH] key in the main 1 Touch screen of document filing mode or in a the one-touch key of the user name 4 Touch that you wish to use to search for the file. screen that shows folders or files in a folder. If you wish to directly enter the user name, touch the [DIRECT ENTRY] key. If you touch the [SEARCH] key in the screen that shows the folders in the custom SEARCH folder or a screen that shows the files in a HDD STATUS folder, the [SEARCH WITHIN CURRENT FOLDER] checkbox will appear. Select this checkbox to search for a file only in the selected folder. SEARCH FILE FOLDER Sasaki Hasegawa Nakata Ono Yamada ABCD EFGHI OK DIRECT ENTRY JKLMN OPQRST UVWXYZ ●The selected user name is highlighted. ●If you select the wrong user name, touch the key of the correct name. ●If you touch the [DIRECT ENTRY] key, a character entry screen will appear. Enter the user name. See page 7-29 for the procedure for entering characters. OR FOLDER NAME]. CANCEL Suzuki ALL USERS search screen, select whether 2 Inyouthewilldata search by [USER NAME] or [FILE SEARCH CANCEL SELECT USER NAME. START SEARCH 5 Touch the [OK] key. USER NAME FILE OR FOLDER NAME CANCEL ●To search by user name, follow steps 3 to 6. ●To search by file name or folder name, perform step 8. ●To stop searching, touch the [CANCEL]key. 3 CANCEL SEARCH 7 Touch the [START SEARCH] key. CANCEL Touch the [USER NAME] key. You will return to the screen of step 2 and the selected user name will appear. DIRECT ENTRY 6 [Searching by user name] OK START SEARCH START SEARCH USER NAME FILE OR FOLDER NAME 7-13 CALLING UP AND USING A FILE results of the user name search 7 The appear. Touch the desired file name or folder name. name or folder name. CANCEL SEARCH FILE OR FOLDER NAME USER NAME SEARCH AGAIN DATE CANCEL SEARCH FILE OR FOLDER NAME USER NAME SEARCH AGAIN DATE Product SpecA AAA 2003/10/20 Product specifications Yamada 2002/12/30 Product B AAA 2003/10/20 Products Sato 2002/12/30 Product 2 AAA 2003/10/20 Product_info Akata ●See page 7-5 for a list of the document filing icons. ●When a file name is touched, the operation selection screen appears. (To perform an operation using the file, go to step 5 on page 7-16.) ●When a folder name is touched, all files in the folder are displayed. Touch the desired file. (To perform an operation using the file, go to step 5 on page 7-16.) ●To change the order of file display, touch the [FILE OR FOLDER NAME] key, [USER NAME] key, or [DATE] key. If you touch a file name or folder name that has a password, a password entry screen will appear. Enter the 5-digit password with the numeric keys. [Searching by file or folder name] 8 Touch the [FILE OR FOLDER NAME] key. USER NAME FILE OR FOLDER NAME A character entry screen appears. Enter the file name or folder name to be used for the search. See page 7-29 to enter characters. 9 Touch the [START SEARCH] key. CANCEL 7-14 results of the file or folder name 10 The search appear. Touch the desired file START SEARCH ●See page 7-5 for a list of the document filing icons. ●When a file name is touched, the operation selection screen appears. (To perform an operation using the file, go to step 5 on page 7-16.) ●When a folder name is touched, all files in the folder are displayed. Touch the desired file. (To perform an operation using the file, go to step 5 on page 7-16.) ●To change the order of file display, touch the [FILE OR FOLDER NAME] key, [USER NAME] key, or [DATE] key. If you touch a file name or folder name that has a password, a password entry screen will appear. Enter the 5-digit password with the numeric keys. CALLING UP AND USING A FILE Calling up and using a saved file A file saved with the document filing function can be called up and printed or manipulated as needed. The following operations can be performed: ● [Print] : Print the file (page 7-17). ● [Send] : Transmit the saved file (page 7-20). The file can be transmitted by Scan to E-mail, Scan to FTP, Scan to Network Folder, fax, or Internet fax. (All of these methods require installation of the appropriate options.) (Page 1-12) ● [Property change] : Change the attribute of the saved file (page 7-21). ● [Move] : Move the file (page 7-22). ● [Delete] : Delete the file (page 7-22). ● [Detail] : Show details on the saved file (page 7-22). ■ General procedure for using a saved file the [DOCUMENT FILING] key on the 1 Press operation panel. DOCUMENT FILING IMAGE SEND PRINT READY DATA CUSTOM FOLDER MAIN FOLDER SEARCH CUSTOM FOLDER 1 CUSTOM FOLDER 2 CUSTOM FOLDER 3 CUSTOM FOLDER 4 CUSTOM FOLDER 5 CUSTOM FOLDER 6 BACK 1/1 LINE DATA CUSTOM FOLDER 7 COPY SYSTEM JOB STATUS SETTINGS 2 the key of the folder that contains 3 Touch the desired file. Touch the [FILE FOLDER] key or the [QUICK FILE FOLDER] key depending on where the file is saved. FILE RETRIEVE FILE FOLDER QUICK FILE FOLDER SEARCH ALL FOLDERS ABCD CUSTOM FOLDER 8 EFGHI JKLMN OPQRST UVWXYZ If there are more custom folder keys than can appear in one screen, touch the or keys to change screens. If a password is set for the selected folder, a password entry screen will appear. Enter the 5digit password with the numeric keys. 4 Touch the desired file key. CUSTOM FOLDER MAIN FOLDER FILE NAME USER NAME SEARCH DATE HDD STATUS ●Touch the [FILE FOLDER] key if the file is saved in the main folder or the custom folder. Touch the [QUICK FILE FOLDER] key if the file is saved in the Quick File folder. If you touched the [FILE FOLDER] key, the files in the main folder or the folders in the custom folder appear. If you open the wrong folder, touch the [MAIN FOLDER] key or the [CUSTOM FOLDER] key and open the correct folder. ●If the desired file is saved in the main folder, go to step 4. If the desired file is saved in a custom folder, go to step 3. ●If you touched the [QUICK FILE FOLDER] key, the files in the Quick File folder appear. Go to step 4. Basic specifications Yamada 2003/10/20 presentaion_0903 Sato 2003/10/20 Product_info Akata 2003/10/20 COPY BACK 1 1 BATCH P. Touch the key of the file that you wish to use. (Parts of the screen that are framed in black are keys that can be touched.) A menu screen will appear. If a password is set for the file, a password entry screen will appear. Enter the 5-digit password with the numeric keys. 7-15 7 CALLING UP AND USING A FILE the key of the operation that you 5 Touch wish to perform. (1) (2) (1) [PRINT] key (see page 7-17) (2) [SEND] key (see page 7-20) (3) [PROPERTY CHANGE] key (see page 7-21) (3) (4) [MOVE] key (see page 7-22) CANCEL JOB SETTINGS Basic specifications Yamada Taro A4 (5) [DELETE] key (see page 7-22) SELECT THE JOB. PRINT SEND PROPERTY CHANGE MOVE DELETE DETAIL (4) (5) (6) (6) [DETAIL] key (see page 7-22) The setting screen of the selected operation appears. See the indicated page. FILE SELECTION SCREEN The file selection screen of the Quick File folder, Main folder, and custom folders is explained below. MAIN FOLDER CUSTOM FOLDER FILE NAME SEARCH USER NAME DATE Basic specifications Yamada 2006/10/20 Products Sato 2006/10/20 Product_info Akata 2006/10/20 ALL FILES 1 File keys The stored files are displayed. An icon showing which mode the file was stored from, the file name, the user name, and the date the file was stored appear in each file key. When a file is touched, the job setting screen appears. 2 7-16 1 3 BATCH P. 3 [Back] key Touch this key to return to the screen one level up. 4 Select displayed files by job type. You can select the file keys that are displayed by job type. [ALL FILES] is initially selected. Touch a tab to show a list of the files that were stored from that mode. [File Name] key, [User Name] key, [Date] key Use these keys to change the order of display of the file keys. When one of the keys is touched, or appears in the key. ● When appears in the [File Name] key or [User Name] key, the files appear by file name or user name in ascending order. When appears in the [Date] key, the files appear in order from the oldest date. ● When appears in the [File Name] key or [User Name] key, the files appear by file name or user name in descending order. When appears in the [Date] key, the files appear in order from the most recent date. BACK 5 [Batch Print] key Touch this key to print all files in a folder. For detailed information on batch printing, see 718. CALLING UP AND USING A FILE ■ [Print] A saved file can be printed. The screen below appears when the [PRINT] key is selected in the operation selection screen. To begin printing, touch the [PRINT] ( 7 ) key. Printing settings can be selected in this screen before printing. The settings that were in effect when the file was saved appear initially. The settings can be changed as needed. NOTES ● When print settings are changed with this procedure, only the value for the number of copies is overwritten. ● The printing speed will be slower for image files saved using certain resolution settings. (See page 7-31.) CANCEL JOB SETTINGS / PRINT Yamada Taro Basic specifications A4 AUTO PAPER SELECT NUMBER OF PRINTS OUTPUT 1 PRINT AND DELETE THE DATA (1~999) 2-SIDED PRINT AND SAVE THE DATA TANDEM PRINT 1 [PAPER SELECT] key 4 If the conditions for tandem printing are met (page 5-10), touch this key to enable tandem printing. See page 5-10 for more information. Use this key to set the paper size. 2 [OUTPUT] key Use this key to select sort, group or staple sort functions, and to select the output tray. 3 5 [NUMBER OF PRINTS] setting key Use this key to set the number of copies. [2-SIDED] key When performing two-sided printing, use this key to select the orientation of the image on the back side of the paper. To have the front and back images oriented in the same direction, touch the [2-SIDED BOOKLET] key. To have the front and back images oriented opposite to each other, touch the [2SIDED TABLET] key. Note that the size and orientation of the saved image may cause these keys to have the opposite effect. If neither key is selected, one-sided printing will take place. [TANDEM PRINT] key 6 [PRINT AND DELETE THE DATA] key Touch this key to print a file and then have it automatically deleted. 7 [PRINT AND SAVE THE DATA] key Touch this key to print a file. The file will not be automatically deleted after printing. 7-17 7 CALLING UP AND USING A FILE ■ Batch printing All files in a folder that have the same user name and password can be printed at once. the [BATCH P.] key in the file list 1 Touch screen of document filing mode. has been established, touch 4 Ifthea password [PASSWORD] key. To print all files of a specific type of job, touch the desired job tab. The files shown on that tab can be printed as a batch. Enter the password with USER NAME Suzuki the numeric keys (5 to 8 digits) and touch the PASSWORD [OK] key. Only files that have the same password will be selected. If you do not wish to enter a password, go to the next step. 2006/01/01 2006/01/01 BATCH P. 2 Touch the [USER NAME] key. set the number of copies, touch the 5 To [CHANGE PRT.NO.] key. ALL FILES USER NAME CHANGE PRT.NO. PASSWORD If you wish to use the number of copies stored with each file, go to step 9. NT AND DELETE THE DATA the user name of the files that you 3 Touch wish to print by batch printing. BATCH PRINT SELECT USER NAME. ALL USERS CANCEL USER UNKNOWN Suzuki Sasaki Hasegawa Nakata Ono ALL USERS OK 1 2 Yamada ABCD EFGHI JKLMN OPQRST UVWXYZ NOTE When [SELECTION OF [ALL USERS] IS NOT ALLOWED.] checkbox and [SELECTION OF [USER UNKNOWN] IS NOT ALLOWED.] are disabled in the administrator settings, the [ALL USERS] key and [USER UNKNOWN] key can be selected. The [ALL USERS] key can be touched to select all files in the folder (the files of all users). The [USER UNKNOWN] key can be touched to select all files in the folder that do not have a user name. 7-18 the [APPLY THE NUMBER FROM 6 Touch STORED SETTING OF EACH JOB] checkbox to remove the checkmark. APPLY THE NUMBER FRO EACH JOB the number of copies with the 7 Set keys. The number of copies can be also set with the numeric keys. R FROM STORED SETTING OF CALLING UP AND USING A FILE 8 Touch the [OK] key. the [PRINT AND DELETE THE 9 Touch DATA] key or the [PRINT AND SAVE THE DATA] key. CANCEL OK If the [PRINT AND DELETE THE DATA] key is touched, the files will PRINT AND SAVE THE DATA be automatically deleted after printing. If the [PRINT AND SAVE THE DATA] key is touched, the files will be saved after printing. If there are no files that match the search conditions, you will return to the file list screen. PRINT AND DELETE THE DATA NOTES ● If "Auditing mode" is enabled in the administrator settings for copy mode, print mode, or document filing mode, it will not be possible to perform batch printing of [ALL FILES]. ● To display the job tab of a mode for which "Auditing mode" is enabled in the administrator settings, the account number must be entered. 7 7-19 CALLING UP AND USING A FILE ■ [Send] A saved file can be transmitted by Scan to E-mail, Scan to FTP, Scan to Network Folder, fax, or Internet fax. These transmission methods require installation of the appropriate options. The following screen appears when the [SEND] key is touched. Select the destination and other settings required for transmission and then touch the [SEND] ( 10 ) key to transmit the file. Transmission settings include the resolution and transmission functions such as a timer setting. Change or select these settings as needed. NOTE Jobs that use the following special functions cannot be transmitted when called up. (The [SEND] key is greyed out in the operation selection screen.) Pamphlet copying, covers/insert, card shot, Multi shot. Jobs that use the following functions can be transmitted with certain restrictions when called up: Card shot:Can be transmitted if saved by scan save or image send. Multi shot (2in1):Can be transmitted if saved as 2in1 using a portrait original. [Example of FAX mode] CANCEL STANDARD RESOLUTION FAX MODE SWITCH ADDRESS BOOK SUB ADDRESS ADDRESS REVIEW SPECIAL MODES Basic specifications Yamada Taro SEND 1 [RESOLUTION] key Use this key to set the resolution. 8 [ADDRESS REVIEW] key Touch this key to display the destinations. 2 [FILE FORMAT] key The [FILE FORMAT] key appears in scan mode (Scan to E-mail, Scan to FTP, or Scan to Network Folder). Touch this key to set the file format of scan images that you transmit. 9 3 [FILE NAME/USER NAME] display This shows the file name and user name of the file to be transmitted. 4 [ ] key (Speed dial key) Use this key to specify a destination by entering the 3-digit number that is assigned to an e-mail address or fax number when it is stored in a onetouch key or group key. 5 [MODE SWITCH] key Use this key to select the transmission mode (Scan to E-mail, Scan to FTP, Scan to Network Folder, fax, or Internet fax). [SPECIAL MODES] key Touch this key to display the special function menu. The functions that can be selected vary depending on the transmission mode: ● Scan to E-mail/FTP/Network Folder TIMER : The transmission time can be specified. ● FAX TIMER : The transmission time can be specified. FAX OWN ADDRESS SENDING: Your sender's information can be included on the fax pages printed out by the receiving machine. ● Internet FAX TIMER : The transmission time can be specified. I-FAX OWN ADDRESS SEND: Your sender's information can be included on the Internet fax pages printed out by the receiving machine. 10 [SEND] key Touch this key after selecting transmission settings to begin transmission. (The [START] key can also be pressed to begin transmission.) 6 [CANCEL] key Touch this key to return to the operation selection screen. 7 [ADDRESS BOOK] key Touch this key to display the destinations stored in the directory. 7-20 CALLING UP AND USING A FILE 11 [SEND SETTINGS] key The [SEND SETTINGS] key is displayed in scanner mode and in Internet fax mode. Touch this key to set the subject and file name. In scanner mode, the sender name can also be set. 12 [SUB ADDRESS] key or [ADDRESS ENTRY] key ● Touch this key to directly enter the destination for a Scan to E-mail, Scan to FTP, Scan to Network Folder, or Internet fax transmission. ● Touch this key to enter the sub-address and passcode for an F-code fax transmission. NOTE See the "Operation manual (for facsimile)" and "Operation manual (for image send)" for detailed explanations of 1 , 2 , 3 , 4 , 5 , 6 , 7 , 8 , 9 , 11 , and 12 . ■ [Property change] Select this operation to change the attribute of a saved file. Three attributes are available: [SHARING], [PROTECT], and [ CONFIDENTIAL]. The following screen appears when the [PROPERTY CHANGE] key is selected in the operation selection screen. Note the restrictions below on changing the attribute. CANCEL JOB SETTINGS / PROPERTY CHANGE Basic specifications Yamada Taro [Restrictions on changing the attribute] ●A file that is set to [SHARING] can be changed to [PROTECT] or [CONFIDENTIAL]. However, a [SHARING] file that is saved in the Quick File folder can only be changed to [PROTECT]. ●A file that is set to [PROTECT] can be changed to [SHARING] or [CONFIDENTIAL]. However, a [PROTECT] file that is saved in the Quick File folder can only be changed to [SHARING]. ●A file that is saved in the Quick File folder cannot be changed to [CONFIDENTIAL]. OK A4 SHARING PROTECT CONFIDENTIAL PASSWORD the [PROPERTY CHANGE] key in 1 Touch the operation selection screen. 3 Touch the [OK] key. PROPERTY CHANGE NCEL 7 OK DETAIL 2 Touch the key of the desired attribute. SHARING CONFIDENTIAL If you are changing a [SHARING] or [PROTECT] file to [CONFIDENTIAL], touch the [PASSWORD] key and enter the password. PROTECT PASSWORD 7-21 CALLING UP AND USING A FILE ■ [Move] ■ [Delete] This operation is used to move a file to a different folder. The following screen appears when the [MOVE] key is selected. Only [SHARING] and [CONFIDENTIAL] files can be moved. A [PROTECT] file can be moved by first using [PROPERTY CHANGE] to change the attribute to [SHARING] or [CONFIDENTIAL]. CANCEL JOB SETTINGS / MOVE Basic specifications Yamada Taro ■ [Detail] A4A4 SELECT THE FOLDER THE FILE IS MOVED TO. FILE NAME Basic specifications MOVE TO: MOVE the [MOVE TO:] key and select the 1 Touch folder to which you wish to move the file. ●Select the main folder or a folder in the custom folder. A file cannot be moved to the Quick File folder. ●The file name can be changed when moving a file. To change the name, touch the [FILE NAME] key and enter the desired file name. See page 7-29 for the procedure for entering characters. 2 Touch the [OK] key. N FOLDER OK 3 Touch the [MOVE] key. amada Taro A4 OVED TO. ations MOVE 4 Touch the [CANCEL] key. CANCEL aro A4 7-22 This operation is used to delete the selected file. Touch the [DELETE] key in the operation select screen. A message asking you to confirm the deletion will appear. Touch the [YES] key to delete the file. Only [SHARING] or [CONFIDENTIAL] files can be deleted. (A [PROTECT] file can be deleted by first using [PROPERTY CHANGE] to change the attribute to [SHARING].) You will return to the operation selection screen. This operation is used to show detailed information on the selected file. Touch the [DETAIL] key to display the information. The information appears on two screens. Touch the key or key to move between the two screens. The file name can be changed in the information screen. To change the name, touch the [FILE NAME] key and enter the desired file name in the character entry screen that appears. See page 729 for the procedure for entering characters. CALLING UP AND USING A FILE ■ Calling up and manipulating a file from the job status screen Files saved using the "FILE" and "QUICK FILE" functions appear as keys in the finished job status screen. You can view information on a file that appears in this screen and manipulate the file. Press the [JOB STATUS] key. 1 AGE SEND DATA view information on the file, touch the 4 To [DETAIL] key. The job status screen appears. COPY Use the keys to change screens. When you are finished, touch the [OK] key to return to the screen of step 3. DETAIL SYSTEM JOB STATUS SETTINGS CALL X JOB 2 Touch the [COMPLETE] key. 1/8 DETAIL OF COPY The finished job screen appears. JOB QUEUE INTERNET FAX FILE NAME: OK COPY_20031021_153050 CALL RESOLUTION:600x600dpi SIZE:A4 1/2 COMPLETE DATE:2003/10/10 15:30 PAGES:10 DETAIL DETAIL OF COPY FILE NAME 3 Touch the key of the desired file. If there are more keys than can appear in one screen and the desired COPY 14:38 12/09 00 file does not appear, Suzuki7890123456 14:09 12/09 00 touch the key or key to change COPY 13:27 12/09 00 screens. The touched key is highlighted. JOBS COMPLETED SET TIME OK COPY_20031021_153050 DATA SIZE: 21,987,543KB CALL DOCUMENT STYLE: SPECIAL MODES: 1-SIDED 2/2 OUTPUT: FILE FORMAT: NUM Tanaka7890123456 14:38 12/09 01 5 Touch the [CALL] key. The operation selection screen appears. CALL X JOB 7 INTERNET-FAX Select and perform the desired operation as explained in "Calling up and using a saved file" (page 7-15). 7-23 SYSTEM SETTINGS Creating, editing, and deleting user names and folders This section explains how to create, edit, and delete user names and custom folders for saving files with the document filing function. User names and custom folders are created and edited at the operation panel of the machine or in the Web page. NOTES ● A previously stored name cannot be used when creating a new user name or custom folder. However, the same password can be used more than once. ● A password cannot be omitted when creating a user name. ■ General procedure for creating, editing, and deleting user names and folders Follow steps 1 to 3 below to create, edit, or delete a user name or custom folder. In step 3, select the key for the specific operation that you wish to perform. 1 Press the [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key. LINE DATA AGE SEND the key of the operation that you 3 Touch wish to perform. Go to the page indicated below for the selected operation. COPY SYSTEM JOB STATUS SETTINGS (1) (2) SYSTEM SETTINGS OK DOCUMENT FILING CONTROL the [DOCUMENT FILING CONTROL] 2 Touch key. TOTAL COUNT DEFAULT SETTINGS ADDRESS CONTROL SENDER CONTROL DOCUMENT FILING CONTROL ADMINISTRATOR USER NAME REGISTRATION AMEND/DELETE USER NAME CUSTOM FOLDER REGISTRATION AMEND/DELETE CUSTOM FOLDER (3) (4) (1) [USER NAME REGISTRATION] key Program a user name. (See the next page) (2) [AMEND/DELETE USER NAME] key Edit or delete a user name. (See page 7-26) (3) [CUSTOM FOLDER REGISTRATION] key Create a custom folder. (See page 7-27) (4) [AMEND/DELETE CUSTOM FOLDER] key Edit or delete a custom folder. (See page 7-28) 7-24 SYSTEM SETTINGS ■ Programming a user name To program a user name, follow steps 1 and 2 on page 7-24, touch the [USER NAME REGISTRATION] key in step 3, and then follow these steps: 1 Touch the [USER NAME] key. The lowest number that has not yet been USER NAME programmed appears PASSWORD automatically in "No.". Touch the number to SELECT THE DEFAULT FOLDER THE F STORED TO: display a character entry screen and enter a user name (maximum of 16 characters). See page 7-29 for the procedure for entering characters. SYSTEM SETTINGS you wish to specify a folder for the user 6 Ifname, touch the [STORED TO:] key. If you wish to use the main folder, go to step 8. No.001 2 Touch the [INITIAL] key. A character entry screen appears. Enter up to 10 search characters. See page 7-29 for the procedure for entering characters. NEXT INITIAL R THE FILE WITH THIS USER NAME IS STORED. No.001 REGISTRATION IS COMPLETED. USER NAME PASSWORD SELECT THE DEFAULT FOLDER THE FILE STORED TO: MAIN FOLDER folders that have been created appear. 7 The Touch the desired folder. If you wish to create a new folder, or if no folders have been created, touch the [ADD NEW] key. STORED TO: MAIN FOLDER CUSTOM FOLDER 1 CUSTOM FOLDER 2 CUSTOM FOLDER 3 CUSTOM FOLDER 4 CUSTOM FOLDER 5 CUSTOM FOLDER 6 CUSTOM FOLDER 7 CUSTOM FOLDER 8 ALL FOLDERS 3 Yamada ABCD EFGHI JKLMN OPQRS ADD NEW 1/1 UVWXY Touch the [PASSWORD] key. SYSTEM SETTINGS A password cannot be omitted. No.001 Yamada USER NAME If you touched the [ADD NEW] key, program a name for the folder as explained on page 7-27. The user name programmed in step 1 is selected as the user name of the folder. PASSWORD SELECT THE DEFAULT FOLDER THE FIL STORED TO: 8 Touch the [EXIT] key. a password for the user name (enter a 4 Set 5-digit password with the numeric keys). This will be the password for the user name entered in step 1. ENTER PASSWORD VIA THE 10-KEY PAD. As each digit is entered, "-" changes to " ". If you make a mistake, press the [C] key and then enter the correct number. You will return to the "USER NAME REGISTRATION" screen. "REGISTRATION IS COMPLETED." will appear highlighted next to "No.". EXIT – – – – – CANCEL 5 exit, touch the [EXIT] key. To program 9 To another user name, touch the [NEXT] key. Touch the [OK] key. NEXT INITIAL Yamada EXIT WITH THIS USER NAME IS STORED. CANCEL 10-KEY PAD. OK EXIT If you touched the [EXIT] key, you will return to the screen of step 3 on page 7-24. If you touched the [NEXT] key, a new user entry screen will appear. Repeat steps 1 to 9 to program a new user. 7-25 7 SYSTEM SETTINGS ■ Editing and deleting a user name To edit or delete a user name, follow steps 1 and 2 on page 7-24 and then follow these steps: the [AMEND/DELETE USER NAME] 1 Touch key. OK [Editing] the key of each item that you wish to 4 Touch edit (edit as explained in steps 1 to 9 in "Programming a user name" on page 725). AMEND/DELETE USER NAME AMEND/DELETE CUSTOM FOLDER USER NAME / AMEND/DELETE No.001 REGISTRATION IS COMPLETED. Yamada USER NAME the [USER NAME] key that you wish 2 Touch to edit or delete. INIT PASSWORD SELECT THE DEFAULT FOLDER THE FILE WITH STORED TO: MAIN FOLDER When you have finished editing the items, "REGISTRATION IS COMPLETED." will appear highlighted next to "NO.". EXIT USER NAME / AMEND/DELETE SELECT USER NAME TO AMEND/DELETE. Suzuki Sasaki Hasegawa Nakata Ono Yamada ALL USERS ABCD EFGHI 1/1 you have finished editing 5 When desired items, touch the [EXIT] key. JKLMN OPQRST UVWXYZ DELETE EXIT A password entry screen will appear. ITIAL 3 the To edit another user name, repeat steps 2 to 4. To exit, touch the [EXIT] key in the screen of step 2. Yamada Enter the 5-digit password with the numeric keys. THIS USER NAME IS STORED ENTER PASSWORD VIA THE 10-KEY PAD. NOTE When a user name is changed, the change is not updated to any previously saved data (files or folders). CANCEL BCD EFGHI JKLMN OPQRST UVWXYZ After entering the password, the following screen will appear. DELETE USER NAME / AMEND/DELETE EXIT No.001 USER NAME Yamada INITIAL [Deleting] 6 Touch the [DELETE] key. Yamada DELETE EXIT PASSWORD SELECT THE DEFAULT FOLDER THE FILE WITH THIS USER NAME IS STORED. STORED TO: MAIN FOLDER ● To edit a user name, perform steps 4 and 5. ● To delete a user name, perform steps 6 and 7. ITIAL Yamada H THIS USER NAME IS STORED 7 Touch the [YES] key. DELETE THE USER NAME? Yamada NO 7-26 YES You will return to the screen of step 2. To delete another user name, repeat steps 2, 3, 5 and 6. To exit, touch the [EXIT] key in the screen of step 2. SYSTEM SETTINGS ■ Creating a custom folder Up to 500 custom folders can be created. When no further folders can be created, delete unneeded folders (page 7-28) and then create a new folder. A password can be omitted when creating a folder. To create a custom folder, follow steps 1 and 2 on page 7-24, touch the [CUSTOM FOLDER REGISTRATION] key in step 3, and then follow the steps below. 1 Touch the [FOLDER NAME] key. The lowest number that has not yet been FOLDER NAME programmed appears INITIAL automatically in "No.". Touch the number to USER NAME display a character entry screen and enter a folder name (maximum of 28 characters). See page 7-29 for the procedure for entering characters. 5 Touch the [OK] key. CUSTOM FOLDER REGISTRATION No.001 EXIT 10-KEY PAD. 6 Touch the [USER NAME] key. No.001 2 Touch the [INITIAL] key. CUSTOM FOLDER REGISTRATION No.001 FOLDER NAME USER FOLDER 1 INITIAL P USER NAME OK CANCEL FOLDER NAME A character entry screen appears. Enter up to 10 search characters. See page 7-29 for the procedure for entering characters. INITIAL USER FOLDER 1 USER1 PAS USER NAME You will select a user name that will be associated with the folder name you are programming. Selection of a user name cannot be omitted. programmed user names appear. 7 The Touch the desired user name. If you do not wish to use any of the user names that appear, touch the [ADD NEW] key to program a new user name. you wish to set a password for the new 3 Iffolder, touch the [PASSWORD] key. A password can be omitted. If you are omitting a password, go to step 6. CUSTOM FOLDER REGISTRATION No.001 FOLDER NAME INITIAL USER FOLDER 1 PASSWORD CUSTOM FOLDER REGISTRATION USER NAME Suzuki Sasaki Hasegawa Nakata Ono Yamada ALL FOLDERS 4 ABCD EFGHI 1/1 7 ADD NEW JKLMN OPQRST UVWXYZ When you touch a user name, a password entry screen appears. If you touched the [ADD NEW] key, program a user name as explained on page 7-25. The folder name programmed in step 1 will be selected as the folder for the user. Set a password for the folder (enter a 5digit password with the numeric keys). CANCEL OK SELECT USER NAME. This will be the password for the folder name entered in step 1. ENTER PASSWORD VIA THE 10-KEY PAD. the 5-digit password of the selected 8 Enter user name with the numeric keys. ENTER PASSWORD VIA THE 10-KEY PAD. CANCEL BCD EFGHI JKLMN OPQRST UVWXYZ 7-27 SYSTEM SETTINGS 9 Touch the [OK] key. exit, touch the [EXIT] key. To create 10 To another folder, touch the [NEXT] key. If you touched the [EXIT] key, you will return to the screen of step 3 on page 7-24. If you touched the [NEXT] key, a new folder screen will appear. Repeat steps 1 to 10 to OK ADD NEW JKLMN OPQRST EXIT NEXT 1/1 SWORD UVWXYZ create a new folder. ■ Editing/deleting a custom folder To edit a previously created folder (change the folder name, initial, password, or user name), or to delete a folder, follow steps 1 and 2 on page 7-24 and then follow the steps below. When deleting a folder... A folder that contains files cannot be deleted. Either move the files to a different folder or delete them before deleting the folder. : [MOVE] (see page 7-22) : [DELETE] (see page 7-22) the [AMEND/DELETE 1 Touch FOLDER] key. CUSTOM [Editing] Touch the key of each item that you wish to edit (edit as explained in steps 1 to 10 of "Creating a custom folder" on page 7-27). 4 AMEND/DELETE USER NAME DELETE CUSTOM FOLDER / AMEND/DELETE AMEND/DELETE CUSTOM FOLDER EXIT No.001 REGISTRATION IS COMPLETED. USER FOLDER 1 FOLDER NAME the [FOLDER NAME] key that you 2 Touch wish to edit or delete. SELECT CUSTOM FOLDER TO AMEND/DELETE. CUSTOM FOLDER 1 CUSTOM FOLDER 2 CUSTOM FOLDER 3 CUSTOM FOLDER 4 CUSTOM FOLDER 5 CUSTOM FOLDER 6 CUSTOM FOLDER 7 ALL FOLDERS ABCD 1/2 CUSTOM FOLDER 8 EFGHI JKLMN OPQRST UVWXYZ If a password has been set for the folder, a password entry screen will appear. Enter the correct 5-digit password with the numeric keys. USER NAME Yamada PASSWORD you have finished editing the items, 5 When touch the [EXIT] key. To edit another folder, repeat steps 2 to 5. [Deleting] Touch the [DELETE] key. 6 3 Edit or delete the folder. DELETE CUSTOM FOLDER / AMEND/DELETE USER1 After editing the items and returning to the screen of step 3, "REGISTRATION IS COMPLETED." will be highlighted to the right of "No.". To stop using a password, touch the [PASSWORD] key and then touch the [OK] key without entering anything for the password. [-] will appear and the password will be cancelled. EXIT CUSTOM FOLDER / AMEND/DELETE INITIAL EXIT No.001 DELETE FOLDER NAME EXIT USER FOLDER 1 INITIAL USER1 USER NAME Yamada PASSWORD ***** ●To edit the folder, perform steps 4 and 5. ●To delete the folder, perform steps 6 and 7. ●To exit, touch the [EXIT] key. ORD – – – – – 7 Touch the [YES] key. DELETE THE FOLDER? USER FOLDER 1 NO 7-28 YES You will return to the screen of step 2. To delete another folder, repeat steps 2, 6, and 7. To exit, touch the [EXIT] key in the screen of step 2. ENTERING CHARACTERS To enter or edit characters in setting screens such as auto dial key programming screens, follow the steps below. Characters that can be entered are alphabetical characters, special characters, numbers, and symbols. ■ Entering alphabetical characters (Example: Sharp äÄ) 1 Touch the [S] key. 5 Touch the [ Characters cannot be entered beyond the " " mark. ÃÄÂ/ãäâ] key. Sharp 6 Touch the [ä] key. To switch between upper case and lower case, touch the [ABC abc] key. When ABC is highlighted, upper case letters are entered. 2 Touch the [ABC Sharp abc] key. S To switch between upper case and lower case, touch the [ÃÄ ãäâ] key. When ãäâ is highlighted, lower case letters are entered. 7 Touch the [ÃÄ ãäâ] key. Sharp ä 3 Touch the [h] key, [a] key, [r] key, and [p] key. Shar 8 Touch the [Ä] key. 7 Sharp ä If you make a mistake, touch the key to move the cursor ( ) back one space and then enter the correct character. You can also press the [AB/ab 12#$%] key during entry to enter a number or symbol. 4 Touch the [SPACE] key. Sharp You can press the [ABC/abc] key during entry to return to alphabetical character entry. You can also enter numbers and symbols. 9 When finished, touch the [OK] key. Sharp äÄ The cursor ( ) moves forward and a space is entered. You will exit the character entry screen and return to the programming screen. If you touch the [CANCEL] key, you will return to the programming screen without storing the entered characters. 7-29 ENTERING CHARACTERS ■ Entering numbers and symbols 1 Touch the [AB/ab 12#$%] key. you have finished 3 When characters, touch the [OK] key. entering 1&1 When the characters "12#$%" are highlighted, number/symbol entry mode is selected. the desired number or symbol. 2 Enter Numbers and symbols that can be entered are as follows: Screen 1/2 You will exit the character entry screen and return to the programming screen. If you touch the [CANCEL] key, you will return to the programming screen without storing the entered characters. NOTE The following symbols cannot be used when entering a file name or folder name. \ ? / " ; : , < > ! * | & # Spaces and the following symbols may be replaced by other characters. Screen 2/2 Change screens by touching the key or key displayed in the screen. If you make a mistake, touch the key to move the cursor ( ) back one space and then enter the correct character. You can continue touching keys to enter characters. You can also touch another character type selection key ([ ÃÄÂ/ãäâ] key or [AB/ab 12#$%] key) to enter characters other than numbers and symbols. 7-30 $ % ' ( ) + - . = @ [ ] ^ ` { } ~ TROUBLESHOOTING This section explains problems frequently encountered when using the document filing function. If you experience any difficulty, refer to the following table. For information on general machine problems, printer problems, fax problems, and network scanner problems, please see the troubleshooting sections of the appropriate manuals. Problem Check Cause and solution A saved file has disappeared. Was the file called up and then printed by touching the [PRINT AND DELETE THE DATA] key? A file that is printed using the [PRINT AND DELETE THE DATA] key is automatically deleted after being printed. To print a file without deleting it, use the [PRINT AND SAVE THE DATA] key. A file cannot be deleted. Is the file's attribute set to [PROTECT]? A file cannot be deleted when its attribute is set to [PROTECT]. Change the attribute to [SHARING] and then delete the file. A file's attribute cannot be set to [CONFIDENTIAL]. Is the file in the main or custom folder? A file in the Quick File folder cannot be set to [CONFIDENTIAL]. Move the file to a different folder or set it to [PROTECT]. A file's attribute cannot be changed to [PROTECT]. Is the file set to [CONFIDENTIAL]? A file cannot be simultaneously set to [CONFIDENTIAL] and [PROTECT]. If set to [CONFIDENTIAL], use [PROPERTY CHANGE] (page 7-21) to change the attribute to [PROTECT]. A name in the Quick File folder is cut off. Was the name programmed in the advanced transmission settings? If the name was programmed in the advanced transmission settings before the file was saved in the Quick File folder, that name will be used. However, if the name is longer than the maximum name length of the Quick File folder (30 characters), the excess characters will be discarded. Resolution settings are not possible. Was the file saved at low resolution? A saved file cannot be transmitted at a resolution higher than the resolution at which it was saved. A file name cannot be stored or changed. Have you entered prohibited characters in the file name? Certain characters (symbols) cannot be used in file names. See "ENTERING CHARACTERS" (entering numbers and symbols) on page 7-29. A custom folder name cannot be stored or changed. Have you entered prohibited characters in the folder name? Certain characters (symbols) cannot be used in folder names. See "ENTERING CHARACTERS" (entering numbers and symbols) on page 7-29. The printing speed of a saved file is slow. The file was saved using one of the following resolution settings: ● 200 x 200 dpi resolution. ● STANDARD (200 x 100 dpi) or FINE (200 x 200 dpi) When a file is saved using one of the resolutions setting at left, the printing speed will be slower than when other resolution settings are used. Black dots appear when a file that was saved with the document filing function is printed. Was the file saved at other than the following resolutions? ● 600x600dpi ● 600x600dpi and HALF TONE To check the resolution of the saved file, touch the [DETAIL] key in step 5 on page 716. This problem can be alleviated by setting the resolution to 600x600dpi when saving a file with scan save. The problem can be further alleviated by selecting HALF TONE after setting the resolution to 600x600dpi, as light images will be printed lightly. 7-31 7 CHAPTER 8 SPECIFICATIONS This chapter contains useful information about the machine. Page SPECIFICATIONS................................................................................... 8-2 INDEX ..................................................................................................... 8-4 8-1 SPECIFICATIONS Type Console Print system Electrophotographic system Exposure system OPC Developer system Dry-type two-component magnetic brush development Paper feed system 4 trays and bypass tray Fusing system Heater roller Resolution Scan: 600 x 600 dpi, output: 600 x 600 dpi Gradation 256 levels Originals Sheets, bound documents Maximum size: A3 or 11" x 17" Copy paper Plain paper and special papers Copy sizes Max. A3 or 11" x 17", min. A5R or 5-1/2" x 8-1/2"R, Postcard Image loss: Max 8 mm or 21/64" (leading edge and trailing edge in total), max. 8 mm or 21/64" (along all other edges in total) Warm-up time 120 seconds or less First-copy time MX-M550U/MX-M620U/MX-M550N/MX-M620N 4.0 seconds or less* MX-M700U/MX-M700N 3.5 seconds or less* * When A4 (8-1/2" x 11") size paper is fed horizontally from tray1 Copy ratio Variable: 25 to 400% in 1% increments, total 376 steps Fixed presets: 25%, 50%, 70%, 81%, 86%, 100%, 115%, 122%, 141%, 200% and 400% for AB system, 25%, 64%, 77%, 100%, 121%, 129%, 200% and 400% for inch system. Continuous copy 999 copies Dimensions (including automatic document feeder) 728 mm (W) x 679 mm (D) x 1192 mm (H) (28-43/64" (W) x 26-47/64" (D) x 46-15/16" (H)) Weight (main unit only) Approx. 185 kg (Approx. 408 lbs.) Overall dimensions (When tray is extended) 1263 mm (W) x 679 mm (D) (49-23/32" (W) x 26-47/64"(D)) Required power supply Local voltage ±10% (For power supply requirements, see the name plate located on the back of the main unit.) Power consumption 220 - 240V 120 - 127V Operating conditions Temperature: 10ºC to 30ºC (50ºF to 86ºF) Humidity: 20% to 85% 8A 16A 1.84 kW 1.8 kW Automatic document feeder Type Two-side simultaneous scanning system Original size A3 to A5 (11" x 17" to 5-1/2" x 8-1/2") Capacity Maximum of 150 sheets (80 g/m2 (20 lbs.)) or total stack height of 19.5 mm (49/64") or less. Original exchange speed One-sided: 65 pages/min. Two-sided: 76 sides/min. Power supply Supplied from machine Some discrepancies may exist in the illustrations and content due to improvements to the machine. 8-2 SPECIFICATIONS Continuous copying speed (when the offset function is not used) MX-M550U/MX-M550N Copy paper size MX-M620U/MX-M620N MX-M700U/MX-M700N 100% / Reduced / Enlarged A3 (11" x 17") 30 copies/min. 34 copies/min. 39 copies/min. B4 (8-1/2" x 14") 35 copies/min. 39 copies/min. 45 copies/min. A4 (8-1/2" x 11") 55 copies/min. 62 copies/min. 70 copies/min. A4R (8-1/2" x 11"R) 40 copies/min. 45 copies/min. 48 copies/min. B5 (7-1/4" x 10-1/2") 55 copies/min. 62 copies/min. 70 copies/min. B5R (7-1/4" x 10-1/2"R) 40 copies/min. 45 copies/min. 48 copies/min. A5R (8-1/2" x 5-1/2"R) 40 copies/min. 45 copies/min. 48 copies/min. Centre tray specifications Output method Face-down output Maximum number of sheets (80g/m2 (20lbs.) /recommended paper) 250 sheets* Paper type Plain paper and special paper * The maximum number of pages that can be held varies depending on ambient conditions in the installation location, the type of paper, and the storage conditions of the paper. Acoustic Noise Emission (measurement according to ISO7779) Printing mode Standby mode 7.3B 5.0B Bystander positions 58dB(A) 34dB(A) Operator position 58dB(A) 35dB(A) Sound power level LwA Sound pressure level LpA (reference) * Noise emission when peripheral devices are installed Emission Concentration (measurement according to RAL-UZ62: Edition Jan. 2002) Ozone 0.02 mg/m3 or less Dust 0.075 mg/m3 or less Styrene 0.07 mg/m3 or less 8 8-3 INDEX [ ] key................................................................. 1-13 [#/P] key ............................................................... 1-13 ■ Numerics 1-sided copy .................................................. 4-7, 4-11 1-sided copy-Automatic document feeder .............. 4-7 1-sided copy-Document glass .............................. 4-11 256MB expansion memory board ........................ 1-12 2in1 ............................................................. 5-24, 7-12 2-sided copy ......................................... 1-3, 4-10, 4-13 ■ A Acceptable originals ............................................... 4-2 Account number ................................................... 1-18 Additional fax memory.......................................... 1-12 Address control .................................................... 2-18 Adjusting the exposure.................................. 1-3, 4-14 Administrator settings........................................... 2-18 Alarm display........................................................ 3-16 All custom setting list............................................ 2-20 Application communication module............. 1-12, 3-19 Application integration module ............................. 1-12 Attributes ................................................................ 7-3 Auditing mode ...................................................... 1-18 Auto image ........................................................... 4-15 Auto power shut-off mode ...................................... 1-9 Automatic copy image rotation ............................... 4-4 Automatic document feeder ................. 1-10, 2-31, 4-2 Automatic document feeder ......................................... -1-sided copies.................................................... 4-7 -Acceptable originals........................................... 4-2 -Automatic two-sided copying ........................... 4-10 -Misfeed original................................................ 2-31 -Setting originals ................................................. 4-3 -User maintenance.............................................. 6-2 Automatic exposure adjustment ........................... 4-14 Automatic selection .............................................. 4-15 Automatic two-sided copying -Automatic document feeder ............................. 4-10 -Document glass ............................................... 4-13 Automatic two-sided printing ................................ 2-13 Auxiliary tray......................................................... 2-10 ■ B B/W reverse............................................ 1-6, 5-2, 5-31 Barcode font kit .................................................... 1-12 Binding change .................................................... 4-13 Book copy .............................................. 1-5, 5-2, 5-26 Book original .......................................................... 5-5 Bypass tray......................................... 1-10, 2-28, 4-20 ■ C [C] key ........................................................... 1-13, 7-4 [CA] key......................................................... 1-13, 7-4 Call for service ..................................................... 2-32 [CALL] key............................................................ 1-16 Calling up and using a file .................................... 7-13 8-4 Calling up and using a saved file.......................... 7-15 -Delete............................................................... 7-22 -Detail................................................................ 7-22 -Move ................................................................ 7-22 -Print.................................................................. 7-17 -Property change .............................................. 7-21 -Send................................................................. 7-20 -Card shot ..................................1-6, 5-2, 5-29, 7-12 Centre erase........................................................... 5-4 Centre tray..................................................... 1-10, 4-9 [CENTRE TRAY] key.............................................. 3-6 Changing the paper size in paper tray ......... 2-3 to 2-6 Clear all key................................................... 1-13, 7-4 Clear key ....................................................... 1-13, 7-4 Clock .................................................................... 2-18 Confidential ............................................................ 7-3 Contents ....................................................... 0-5 to 0-6 Continuous copying speed ..................................... 8-3 [COPY] key........................................................... 1-13 Cover of the duplex unit........................................ 1-11 Covers/inserts ........................................1-5, 5-2, 5-12 Creating a custom folder ...................................... 7-27 Custom folder ...........................7-3, 7-24, 7-27 to 7-28 ■ D Data security kit.................................................... 1-12 Default settings..................................................... 2-20 [DETAIL] key......................................................... 1-16 Display contrast.................................................... 2-20 Display switching keys.......................................... 1-16 Disposal of hole punch scrap ............................... 3-10 Document feeder tray ...................................... 4-2, 4-3 Document filing control......................................... 2-18 Document filing function .................................. 1-8, 7-1 Document filing user / folder list ........................... 2-20 [DOCUMENT FILING] key ............................ 1-13, 7-4 Document glass -1-sided copies.................................................. 4-11 -Automatic two-sided copying ........................... 4-13 -Placing originals................................................. 4-3 -User maintenance .............................................. 6-2 Document transfer cover ............................... 2-31, 4-3 Dual page copy ........................................1-4, 5-2, 5-5 DUAL PAGE SCAN .............................................. 7-12 Duplex unit ........................................................... 1-11 ■ E Editing and deleting -Custom folder................................................... 7-28 -User names...................................................... 7-26 Energy saving features........................................... 1-9 Energy Star guidelines ........................................... 1-9 Enlargement ......................................................... 4-15 Entering characters .................................. 7-29 to 7-30 Erase ...............................................1-4, 5-2, 5-4, 7-12 INDEX Examples of covers and inserts ............... 5-17 to 5-22 -Covers.................................................. 5-18 to 5-21 -Inserts .............................................................. 5-22 External account module............................. 1-12, 3-20 ■ F Facsimile expansion kit ........................................ 1-12 Fax data receive/forward ...................................... 2-18 [FAX JOB] key ...................................................... 1-16 Features ................................................................. 1-3 [FILE FOLDER] key................................................ 7-5 Finisher ......................................................... 1-10, 3-2 [FINISHER TRAY] key............................................ 3-6 Front cover .................................................... 1-10, 3-2 Fusing unit.......................................... 1-11, 2-23, 2-24 ■ G General procedure for using special functions ....... 5-2 Greyed out............................................................ 1-14 Group ....................................................... 1-3, 3-4, 4-9 [GROUP] key.......................................................... 3-6 ■ H [HDD STATUS] key................................................. 7-5 Heavy paper ................................................ 2-12, 2-13 Highlighted ........................................................... 1-14 Hole punching ................................................. 1-8, 3-5 ■ I Icon ...................................................... 1-14, 5-17, 7-5 [IMAGE SEND] key .............................................. 1-13 Information ........................................................... 2-23 Inserter................................................. 1-8, 1-10, 3-14 Installation requirements ........................................ 0-2 Interior .................................................................. 1-11 Internet fax expansion kit ..................................... 1-12 [INTERNET-FAX] key ........................................... 1-16 Interrupting a copy run .................................. 1-7, 5-46 ■ J Job build ..........................................1-5, 5-2, 5-8, 7-12 Job programs .................................... 1-6, 5-44 to 5-45 -Calling up ......................................................... 5-45 -Deleting............................................................ 5-45 -Storing ............................................................. 5-44 Job status screen ................................................. 1-15 [JOB STATUS] key ............................................... 1-13 ■ K Keyboard select.................................................... 2-20 ■ L Labels................................................................... 2-12 Landscape.............................................................. 1-2 Large capacity tray (AR-LC6)............... 1-10, 2-7, 2-29 Large capacity tray (AR-LC7)............... 1-10, 2-8, 2-30 Left cover of paper drawer ................................... 1-11 Left side cover release ......................................... 1-11 List print................................................................ 2-20 Loading paper ........................................................ 2-2 -bypass tray ....................................................... 2-10 -tray 1 - tray 2 ...................................................... 2-2 -tray 3 .................................................................. 2-5 -tray 5 ........................................................ 2-7 to 2-9 LOGOUT .............................................................. 1-13 [LOGOUT] key............................................. 1-13, 1-18 Lower cover ............................................................ 3-2 ■ M Main features................................................ 1-3 to 1-8 Main folder.............................................................. 7-3 Main power switch ....................................... 1-11, 1-17 Main screen............................................................ 5-2 Manual exposure adjustment ............................... 4-14 Manual selection .................................................. 4-16 Margin Shift ..............................................1-4, 5-2, 5-3 Meaning of "R" ....................................................... 1-2 Mirror image ...........................................1-6, 5-2, 5-31 Misfeed...................... 2-23 to 2-31, 3-11 to 3-12, 3-18 Misfeed in the paper feed area................. 2-26 to 2-30 Misfeed original .................................................... 2-31 Misfeed removal ................................................... 2-23 -Tray 1 - tray 2 ................................................... 2-26 -Tray 3 - tray 4 ................................................... 2-27 -Automatic document feeder ............................. 2-31 -Bypass tray ...................................................... 2-28 -Finisher/saddle stitch finisher........................... 3-11 -Inserter............................................................. 3-17 -Transport area, fusing area, and exit area ....... 2-24 -Tray 5 ................................................... 2-29 to 2-30 -Duplex unit ....................................................... 2-25 Mode select key ................................................... 1-15 Mode select keys........................................... 1-13, 7-4 More information on plain paper........................... 2-13 More information on special media ...................... 2-13 Multi shot ................................................1-5, 5-3, 5-24 ■ N Network expansion kit .......................................... 1-12 Network scanner expansion kit ............................ 1-12 Non-standard sizes .....................2-12, 2-14, 2-17, 4-5 Number of pages printed...................................... 1-18 number of pages transmitted (scanned)............... 1-18 Numeric keys................................................. 1-13, 7-4 ■ O Offset............................................................... 1-7, 3-4 [OFFSET] key......................................................... 3-6 Operation panel........................................... 1-10, 1-13 -Document filing function..................................... 7-4 -Inserter............................................................. 3-15 Original guides ....................................................... 4-3 Original orientation .......................................... 3-5, 4-4 Original size .............................................4-2, 4-5, 4-6 Output .............................................3-4, 3-6, 4-9, 4-12 Output tray..................................................... 1-10, 4-9 8-5 8 INDEX ■ P Pamphlet copy.......................................... 1-4, 5-2, 5-6 Paper curled ......................................................... 2-33 Paper tray settings ...................................... 2-14, 2-20 Part names -Exterior ............................................................ 1-10 -Finisher and the saddle stitch finisher................ 3-2 -Inserter............................................................. 3-14 -Interior.............................................................. 1-11 -Operation panel ............................... 1-13, 3-15, 7-4 -Trays................................................................... 2-2 Password................................................................ 7-8 Peripheral devices ....................................... 1-10, 1-12 Photo.................................................................... 4-14 Photoconductive drum ......................................... 1-11 Placing originals ..................................................... 4-3 Plain paper ............................................... 2-12 to 2-13 Portrait.................................................................... 1-2 Postcards ........................................ 2-10 to 2-11, 4-20 Power .......................................................... 1-17, 2-32 Power switch ............................................... 1-11, 1-17 Preheat mode......................................................... 1-9 Preset copy ratios................................................. 4-16 [PRINT JOB] key .................................................. 1-16 PRINT mode indicators ........................................ 1-13 Printer condition ................................................... 2-18 Printer test page................................................... 2-20 [PRIORITY] key.................................................... 1-16 Proper storage ..................................................... 2-22 Protect.................................................................... 7-3 PS3 expansion kit ................................................ 1-12 Punch module ............................................... 1-11, 3-2 [PUNCH] key ................................................. 3-6, 3-15 ■ Q Quick File folder ..................................................... 7-3 [QUICK FILE FOLDER] key ................................... 7-5 ■ R [READ-END] key ................................. 4-12, 5-8 to 5-9 Reduction ............................................................. 4-15 Reduction/Enlargement................................. 1-4, 4-15 Replacing the toner cartridges ............................. 2-21 Right side cover.................................................... 1-11 Rotation copying .................................................... 4-4 ■ S Saddle stitch.................................................... 1-8, 3-5 Saddle stitch finisher ..................................... 1-10, 3-2 Saddle stitch tray.................................................... 3-2 [SADDLE STITCH] key .......................................... 3-6 Saving a document image file .................... 7-6 to 7-12 -Filing ........................................................ 7-7 to 7-8 -Print jobs ............................................................ 7-9 -Quick file ............................................................ 7-6 -Scan save ............................................ 7-10 to 7-11 [SCAN TO] key ..................................................... 1-15 [SCAN TO HDD] key .............................................. 7-5 [SEARCH] key........................................................ 7-5 Searching for a file ................................... 7-13 to 7-14 8-6 Selecting a function .............................................. 1-14 Selecting the exposure level................................. 4-14 Selecting the exposure mode............................... 4-14 Selecting the output tray......................................... 4-9 Sender control ...................................................... 2-18 Sender control list ................................................ 2-20 Sending address list ............................................. 2-20 Setting the paper size............................... 2-14 to 2-17 Setting the paper type .............................. 2-14 to 2-16 Sharing................................................................... 7-3 Sharp OSA ........................................................... 3-19 Sort...........................................................1-3, 3-4, 4-9 [SORT] key ............................................................. 3-6 Special modes (Copier operation).......................... 5-2 Special modes (Document filing function) ............ 7-12 Special paper ........................................... 2-12 to 2-13 Special papers ..................................................... 4-20 Specifications ............................................... 8-2 to 8-3 -Finisher/saddle stitch finisher................... 3-2 to 3-3 -Inserter............................................................. 3-14 -Large capacity tray (AR-LC6)............................. 2-7 -Large capacity tray (AR-LC7)............................. 2-8 -Punch module .................................................... 3-3 Specifications of paper trays ................................ 2-12 Standard sizes............................................... 1-2, 2-13 Standard sizes in both the AB and inch systems ... 1-2 Staple cartridge ...................................................... 3-3 Staple cartridge replacement ....................... 3-7 to 3-8 Staple jam removal..................................... 3-9 to 3-10 Staple sort ....................................................... 1-7, 3-4 [STAPLE SORT] key............................................... 3-6 [STAPLE] key ....................................................... 3-15 Stapler compiler ..................................................... 3-2 Stapling positions ................................................... 3-4 [START] key................................................. 1-13, 3-15 [STOP/DELETE] key ............................................ 1-16 Storage of supplies............................................... 2-22 System settings ........................................... 2-18, 7-24 [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key ............................ 1-13, 7-4 ■ T Tab copy .................................................1-6, 5-2, 5-26 Tabbed paper ............2-6, 2-10, 2-12 to 2-13, 3-15, 4-20, 5-12, 5-27 Tandem copy ..........................................1-5, 5-2, 5-10 Text....................................................................... 4-14 Text/photo............................................................. 4-14 The machine does not operate...................... 2-32, 6-3 Toner cartridge ............................................ 1-11, 2-21 Top cover ................................................................ 3-2 Total count ............................................................ 2-20 Total number of originals ........................................ 4-2 Touch panel ...................................1-13, 1-14, 7-4, 7-5 Transparency film .............. 2-6, 2-12, 2-13, 4-20, 5-23 Transparency inserts ..............................1-5, 5-2, 5-23 Tray................................................................ 1-10, 3-2 Tray 1..........................................1-10, 2-2 to 2-4, 2-26 Tray 2..........................................1-10, 2-2 to 2-4, 2-26 Tray 3.................................................... 1-10, 2-5, 2-27 Tray 4.................................................... 1-10, 2-6, 2-27 Tray 5................................... 1-10, 2-7, 2-8, 2-29, 2-30 INDEX Troubleshooting -Copier operation ................................................ 6-3 -Document filing function................................... 7-31 -Finisher/saddle stitch finisher........................... 3-13 -General information ............................. 2-32 to 2-34 -Inserter............................................................. 3-18 Types and sizes of paper ......................... 2-12 to 2-13 Types and sizes of paper that can be used .......... 2-12 ■ U Upper cover of large capacity tray........................ 1-11 User maintenance .................................................. 6-2 User name................................................ 7-24 to 7-26 ■ W Warming up .......................................................... 2-32 ■ X XY Zoom ....................................................... 1-4, 4-18 ■ Z Zoom .................................................................... 4-16 8 8-7 ➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣ Required in IEC-950 (EN 60 950) - Europe • The equipment should be installed near an accessible socket outlet for easy disconnection. Required in Appendix ZB of BS 7002 (En 60 950) — United Kingdom MAINS PLUG WIRING INSTRUCTIONS The mains lead of this equipment is already fitted with a mains plug which is either a non-rewireable (moulded) or a rewireable type. Should the fuse need to be replaced, a BSI or ASTA approved fuse to BS1362 marked or and of the same rating as the one removed from the plug must be used. Always refit the fuse cover after replacing the fuse on the moulded plug. Never use the plug without the fuse cover fitted. In the unlikely event of the socket outlet in your home not being compatible with the plug supplied either cut-off the moulded plug (if this type is fitted) or remove by undoing the screws if a rewireable plug is fitted and fit an appropriate type observing the wiring code below. DANGER: The fuse should be removed from the cut-off plug and the plug destroyed immediately and disposed of in a safe manner. Under no circumstances should the cut-off plug be inserted elsewhere into a 13A socket outlet as a serious electric shock may occur. To fit an appropriate plug to the mains lead, follow the instructions below: IMPORTANT: The wires in this mains lead are coloured in accordance with the following code: GREEN-AND-YELLOW: Earth BLUE: Neutral BROWN: Live As the colours of the wires in this mains lead may not correspond with coloured markings identifying the terminals in your plug, proceed as follows: The wire which is coloured GREEN-AND-YELLOW must be connected to the terminal in the plug which is marked with the letter E, or by the safety earth symbol Å@, or coloured green or greenand-yellow. The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter N or coloured black. The wire which is coloured BROWN must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter L or coloured red. If you have any doubt, consult a qualified electrician. WARNING: THIS APPARATUS MUST BE EARTHED. ➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢ ➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣ ➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢ SHARP ELECTRONICS (Europe) GmbH Sonninstraße 3, D-20097 Hamburg MX-M550U/MX-M620U/MX-M700U/MX-M550N/MX-M620N/MX-M700N OPERATION MANUAL (for general information and copier operation) PRINTED IN FRANCE TINSE3587GHZZ
Source Exif Data:
File Type : PDF File Type Extension : pdf MIME Type : application/pdf PDF Version : 1.4 Linearized : No Modify Date : 2007:05:03 13:56:14+02:00 Create Date : 2007:01:18 15:19:51Z Subject : Operation Manual, Copier, English Keywords : MX-M550U, MX-M550N, MX-M620U, MX-M620N, MX-M700U, MX-M700N, MXM550U, MXM550N, MXM620U, MXM620N, MXM700U, MXM700N Page Count : 200 Creation Date : 2007:01:18 15:19:51Z Mod Date : 2007:05:03 13:56:14+02:00 Producer : Acrobat Distiller 5.0 (Windows) Author : SCEE-Smolka Metadata Date : 2007:05:03 13:56:14+02:00 Creator : SCEE-Smolka Title : MX-M550U/N/M620U/N/M700U/N Operation-Manual Copier GB Description : Operation Manual, Copier, English Page Mode : UseNone Has XFA : No Page Layout : SinglePageEXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools